Substituted pyrrolo[3,4-e]indolizines, imidazo[1,2-a]pyrrolo[3,4-e]pyridines, pyrrolo[3,4-e][1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridines and pyrrolo[3,4-e][1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyridines as positive allosteric modulators of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M1

ABSTRACT

Substituted pyrrolopyridine, imidazopyridine and triazolopyridine compounds having a formula 
                         
are positive allosteric modulators of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M 1  (mAChR M 1 ) and the compounds and their pharmaceutical compositions may be useful in treating neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction. Compounds of the invention may be prepared in several steps from 2-halo-5,6-dihydro-7H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one intermediates.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/152,631, filed Apr. 24, 2015, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference.

STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH

This invention was made with U.S. Government support under grant numbers U01MH087965, awarded by the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH). The U.S. government has certain rights in the invention.

BACKGROUND

Alzheimer's disease (AD) is a neurodegenerative disease affecting the elderly, which results in progressive impairment of memory, language skills and severe behavioral deficits. Hallmarks of the disease include degeneration of cholinergic neurons in the cerebral cortex, hippocampus, basal forebrain and other regions of the brain important for memory and cognition. Other hallmarks of AD include neurofibrillary tangles composed of hyperphosphorylated tau and accumulation of amyloid β peptide (Aβ). Aβ is a 39-43 amino acid peptide produced in the brain by proteolytic processing of (3-amyloid precursor protein (APP) by the β-amyloid cleaving enzyme (BACE) and gamma secretase which leads to accumulation of AP in the brain, where Aβ1-40 and 1-42 are the principal aggregate-forming species of Aβ.

Schizophrenia is a debilitating psychiatric disorder characterized by a combination of negative (blunted affect, withdrawal, anhedonia) and positive (paranoia, hallucinations, delusions) symptoms as well as marked cognitive deficits. While schizophrenia remains an idiopathic disorder, it appears to be produced by a complex interaction of biological, environmental, and genetic factors. Over 40 years ago it was found that phencyclidine (PCP) induces a psychotic state in humans that is very similar to that observed in schizophrenic patients. The finding that the main mode of action of PCP is that of a non-competitive antagonist of the N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) subtype of ionotropic glutamate receptor stimulated a series of studies that have led to the development of the NMDA receptor hypofunction model of schizophrenia. Besides schizophrenia, dysfunction of glutamatergic pathways has been implicated in a number of disease states in the human central nervous system (CNS) including cognitive deficits, dementias, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease and bipolar disorder.

NMDA receptor function can be modulated by activation of G Protein-Coupled Receptors (GPCRs) that are known to physically and/or functionally interact with the NMDA receptor. The NMDA receptor hypofunction hypothesis is a proposal to explain the underlying cause of schizophrenia. According to this hypothesis, any agent that can potentiate NMDA receptor currents, either directly by action on modulatory sites on the NMDA receptor (e.g., the glycine co-agonist binding site) or indirectly by activation of GPCRs known to potentiate NMDA receptor function (e.g. the M₁ mAChR), has the potential to ameliorate the symptoms of schizophrenia. In both preclinical and in clinical studies, Xanomeline, an M₁/M₄ preferring orthosteric agonist has proved efficacious with regard to positive, negative and cognitive symptoms, indicating that M₁ activation is a reasonable approach to the treatment of schizophrenia. More recently, the selective M₁ allosteric agonist TBPB demonstrated efficacy in multiple preclinical models of schizophrenia.

Positive allosteric modulators are compounds that bind to a target, such as a receptor, and can enhance the affinity or efficacy of an orthosteric agonist. For example, a selective muscarinic M₁ positive allosteric modulator would preferentially bind to the muscarinic M₁ receptor which would result in an increased affinity at that receptor for acetylcholine (ACh), the endogenous agonist for the muscarinic M₁ receptor, or an increase in the efficacy induced by ACh. In some systems, the compound may also have an intrinsic activity to activate the receptor in the absence of orthosteric ligand. As another example, a dual M₁/M₄ positive allosteric modulator would induce a potentiating effect at both the M₁ and M₄ muscarinic receptors, but not necessarily to an identical extent at both receptors. Positive allosteric modulation (potentiation), therefore, can be an attractive mechanism for enhancing appropriate physiological receptor activation.

Cholinergic neurotransmission involves the activation of nicotinic acetylcholine receptors (nAChRs) or the muscarinic acetylcholine receptors (mAChRs) by the binding of the endogenous orthosteric agonist acetylcholine (ACh). Acetylcholinesterase inhibitors, which inhibit the hydrolysis of ACh, have been approved in the United States for use in the palliative, but not disease-modifying, treatment of the cognitive deficits in AD patients. An alternative approach to pharmacologically increase the effects of ACh could be accomplished through the use of positive allosteric modulators either alone or possibly in combination with other mAChR agonists. mAChRs are widely expressed throughout the body. The mAChRs are members of the family A GPCRs and include five subtypes, designated M₁-M₅. M₁, M₃ and M₅ mainly couple to Gq and activate phospholipase C whereas M₂ and M₄ mainly couple to G_(i/o) and associated effector systems. These five distinct mAChR subtypes have been identified in the mammalian central nervous system where they are prevalent and differentially expressed. M₁-M₅ mAChRs have varying roles in cognitive, sensory, motor and autonomic functions. Activation of various muscarinic receptors, particularly the M₁ subtype, has been proposed as a mechanism to enhance cognition in disorders such as AD. Thus, without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that selective positive allosteric modulators of mAChR subtypes that regulate processes involved in cognitive function could prove superior to AChE inhibitors for treatment of AD and related disorders as it is postulated that these compounds would exhibit improved selectivity for specific mAChRs

Evidence suggests that the most prominent adverse effects of AChE inhibitors and other cholinergic agents are mediated by activation of peripheral M₂ and M₃ mAChRs and include bradycardia, GI distress, excessive salivation, and sweating. In contrast, M₁ has been viewed as the most likely subtype for mediating the effects on cognition, attention mechanisms, and sensory processing. Because of this, considerable effort has been focused on developing selective M₁ agonists and positive allosteric modulators for the treatment of AD. Unfortunately, these efforts have been largely unsuccessful because of an inability to develop compounds that are highly selective for the M₁ mAChR. Because of this, mAChR agonists that have been tested in clinical studies induce the same adverse effects of AChE inhibitors by activation of peripheral mAChRs. To fully understand the physiological roles of individual mAChR subtypes and to further explore the therapeutic utility of mACh receptors in AD and other disorders, it can be important to develop compounds that are highly selective positive allosteric modulators of M₁ and other individual mAChR subtypes.

Previous attempts to develop activators that are highly selective for individual mAChR subtypes have failed because of the high conservation of the orthosteric ACh binding site. To circumvent problems associated with targeting the highly conserved orthosteric ACh site, a number of groups have shifted their focus to developing compounds that act at allosteric sites on mAChRs that are removed from the orthosteric site and are less highly conserved. This approach is proving to be successful in developing selective ligands for multiple GPCR subtypes. In the case of mAChRs, a major goal has been to develop allosteric ligands that selectively increase activity of M₁ or other mAChR subtypes. Allosteric activators can include allosteric agonists, that act at a site removed from the orthosteric site to directly activate the receptor in the absence of ACh as well as positive allosteric modulators (PAMs), which do not activate the receptor directly but potentiate activation of the receptor by the endogenous orthosteric agonist ACh. Also, it is possible for a single molecule to have both allosteric potentiator and allosteric agonist activity.

Phase III trials have shown that orthosteric mAChR activators can have efficacy in improving cognitive performance in AD patients. Moreover, data indicate that administration of M₁ activators decreases behavioral disturbances, including delusions, hallucinations, outbursts, and other symptoms in patients suffering from neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease. However, dose limiting adverse effects that may be due to lack of M₁ mAChR selectivity led to failed launches of previous M₁ agonists. In some cases, evidence suggests that mAChR activation also has the potential to be disease-modifying in that these agents may lower Aβ in AD patients. Interestingly, the M₁-selective allosteric agonist TBPB was found to display effects on the processing of APP toward the non-amyloidogenic pathway and decrease Aβ 1-40 and 1-42 production in vitro. These data suggest that selective activation of M₁ may provide a novel approach for both symptomatic and disease modifying the treatment of Alzheimer's disease.

Despite advances in muscarinic receptor (mAChR) research, there is still a scarcity of compounds that are potent, efficacious and selective positive allosteric modulators of the M₁ mAChR that are also effective in the treatment of neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with cholinergic activity, or other neurologic diseases in which the muscarinic M₁ receptor may be involved. These needs and other needs are addressed by the present invention.

SUMMARY

In accordance with the purpose(s) of the invention, as embodied and broadly described herein, the invention, in one aspect, relates to substituted 2-benzyl-isoindolin-1-one analogs as positive allosteric modulators (i.e., potentiators) of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M₁ (mAChR M₁), methods of making same, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods of treating neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction using same.

Disclosed are compounds represented by a formula:

wherein Q is N or CR^(3a); wherein Z is N or CR^(3b), provided that Q and Z are not simultaneously N; wherein V is N or CR^(3c), provided that when V is CR^(3c), then Q and Z are, respectively, CR^(3a) and CR^(3b); wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino and C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, and C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Also disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more disclosed compounds, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

Also disclosed are methods for the treatment of a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction in a mammal comprising the step of administering to the mammal a therapeutically effective amount of at least one disclosed compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof.

Also disclosed are methods for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal comprising the step of administering to the mammal a therapeutically effective amount of at least one disclosed compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof.

Also disclosed are methods for enhancing cognition in a mammal comprising the step of administering to the mammal an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof.

Also disclosed are methods for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in at least one cell, comprising the step of contacting the cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof.

Also disclosed are uses of a disclosed compound, a disclosed product of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof.

Also disclosed are uses of a disclosed compound, a disclosed product of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with a muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction in a mammal.

Also disclosed are methods for the manufacture of a medicament to potentiate the mAChR M₁ in a mammal comprising combining at least one disclosed compound or at least one disclosed product with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.

Also disclosed are kits comprising at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof, and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to increase mAChR M₁ activity; (b) at least one agent known to decrease mAChR M₁ activity; (c) at least one agent known to treat a disorder associated with cholinergic activity; (d) instructions for treating a disorder associated with cholinergic activity; (e) instructions for treating a disorder associated with mAChR M₁ receptor activity; or (f) instructions for administering the compound in connection with cognitive or behavioral therapy.

While aspects of the present invention can be described and claimed in a particular statutory class, such as the system statutory class, this is for convenience only and one of skill in the art will understand that each aspect of the present invention can be described and claimed in any statutory class. Unless otherwise expressly stated, it is in no way intended that any method or aspect set forth herein be construed as requiring that its steps be performed in a specific order. Accordingly, where a method claim does not specifically state in the claims or descriptions that the steps are to be limited to a specific order, it is no way intended that an order be inferred, in any respect. This holds for any possible non-express basis for interpretation, including matters of logic with respect to arrangement of steps or operational flow, plain meaning derived from grammatical organization or punctuation, or the number or type of aspects described in the specification.

Additional advantages of the invention will be set forth in part in the description which follows, and in part will be obvious from the description, or can be learned by practice of the invention. The advantages of the invention will be realized and attained by means of the elements and combinations particularly pointed out in the appended claims. It is to be understood that both the foregoing general description and the following detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only and are not restrictive of the invention, as claimed.

DESCRIPTION

The present invention can be understood more readily by reference to the following detailed description of the invention and the Examples included therein.

Before the present compounds, compositions, articles, systems, devices, and/or methods are disclosed and described, it is to be understood that they are not limited to specific synthetic methods unless otherwise specified, or to particular reagents unless otherwise specified, as such may, of course, vary. It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular aspects only and is not intended to be limiting. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, example methods and materials are now described.

All publications mentioned herein are incorporated herein by reference to disclose and describe the methods and/or materials in connection with which the publications are cited. The publications discussed herein are provided solely for their disclosure prior to the filing date of the present application. Nothing herein is to be construed as an admission that the present invention is not entitled to antedate such publication by virtue of prior invention. Further, the dates of publication provided herein can be different from the actual publication dates, which can require independent confirmation.

A. Definitions

As used herein, nomenclature for compounds, including organic compounds, can be given using common names, IUPAC, IUBMB, or CAS recommendations for nomenclature. When one or more stereochemical features are present, Cahn-Ingold-Prelog rules for stereochemistry can be employed to designate stereochemical priority, E/Z specification, and the like. One of skill in the art can readily ascertain the structure of a compound if given a name, either by systemic reduction of the compound structure using naming conventions, or by commercially available software, such as CHEMDRAW™ (Cambridgesoft Corporation, U.S.A.).

As used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to “a functional group,” “an alkyl,” or “a residue” includes mixtures of two or more such functional groups, alkyls, or residues, and the like.

Ranges can be expressed herein as from “about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, a further aspect includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent “about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms a further aspect. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as “about” that particular value in addition to the value itself. For example, if the value “10” is disclosed, then “about 10” is also disclosed. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.

References in the specification and concluding claims to parts by weight of a particular element or component in a composition denotes the weight relationship between the element or component and any other elements or components in the composition or article for which a part by weight is expressed. Thus, in a compound containing 2 parts by weight of component X and 5 parts by weight component Y, X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.

A weight percent (wt. %) of a component, unless specifically stated to the contrary, is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included.

As used herein, the terms “optional” or “optionally” means that the subsequently described event or circumstance can or cannot occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.

As used herein, the term “allosteric site” refers to a ligand binding site that is topographically distinct from the orthosteric binding site.

As used herein, the term “modulator” refers to a molecular entity (e.g., but not limited to, a ligand and a disclosed compound) that modulates the activity of the target receptor protein.

As used herein, the term “ligand” refers to a natural or synthetic molecular entity that is capable of associating or binding to a receptor to form a complex and mediate, prevent or modify a biological effect. Thus, the term “ligand” encompasses allosteric modulators, inhibitors, activators, agonists, antagonists, natural substrates and analogs of natural substrates.

As used herein, the terms “natural ligand” and “endogenous ligand” are used interchangeably, and refer to a naturally occurring ligand, found in nature, which binds to a receptor.

As used herein, the term “orthosteric site” refers to the primary binding site on a receptor that is recognized by the endogenous ligand or agonist for that receptor. For example, the orthosteric site in the mAChR M₁ receptor is the site that acetylcholine binds.

As used herein, the term “mAChR M₁ receptor positive allosteric modulator” refers to any, exogenously administered compound or agent that directly or indirectly augments the activity of the mAChR M₁ receptor in the presence or in the absence of acetylcholine, or another agonist, in an animal, in particular a mammal, for example a human. In one aspect, a mAChR M₁ receptor positive allosteric modulator increases the activity of the mAChR M₁ receptor in a cell in the presence of extracellular acetylcholine. The cell can be Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with human mAChR M₁. The cell can be Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) culls transfected with rat mAChR M₁ receptor. The cell can be Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with a mammalian mAChR M₁. The term “mAChR M₁ receptor positive allosteric modulator” includes a compound that is a “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator” or a “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric agonist,” as well as a compound that has mixed activity comprising pharmacology of both a “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator” and a “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric agonist”. The term “mAChR M₁ receptor positive allosteric modulator also includes a compound that is a “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric enhancer.”

As used herein, the term “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator” refers to any exogenously administered compound or agent that directly or indirectly augments the response produced by the endogenous ligand (such as acetylcholine) when the endogenous ligand binds to the orthosteric site of the mAChR M₁ receptor in an animal, in particular a mammal, for example a human. The mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator binds to a site other than the orthosteric site, that is, an allosteric site, and positively augments the response of the receptor to an agonist or the endogenous ligand. In one aspect, an allosteric potentiator does not induce desensitization of the receptor, activity of a compound as a mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator provides advantages over the use of a pure mAChR M₁ receptor orthosteric agonist. Such advantages can include, for example, increased safety margin, higher tolerability, diminished potential for abuse, and reduced toxicity.

As used herein, the term “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric enhancer” refers to any exogenously administered compound or agent that directly or indirectly augments the response produced by the endogenous ligand (such as acetylcholine) in an animal, in particular a mammal, for example a human. In one aspect, the allosteric enhancer increases the affinity of the natural ligand or agonist for the orthosteric site. In another aspect, an allosteric enhancer increases the agonist efficacy. The mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator binds to a site other than the orthosteric site, that is, an allosteric site, and positively augments the response of the receptor to an agonist or the endogenous ligand. An allosteric enhancer has no effect on the receptor by itself and requires the presence of an agonist or the natural ligand to realize a receptor effect.

As used herein, the term “mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric agonist” refers to any exogenously administered compound or agent that directly activates the activity of the mAChR M₁ receptor in the absence of the endogenous ligand (such as acetylcholine) in an animal, in particular a mammal, for example a human. The mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric agonist binds to a site that is distinct from the orthosteric acetylcholine site of the mAChR receptor and activates the binding of an agonist or the natural ligand to the orthosteric site of the mAChR M₁ receptor. Because it does not require the presence of the endogenous ligand, activity of a compound as a mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric agonist provides advantages over the use of a pure mAChR M₁ receptor allosteric potentiator, such as more rapid onset of action.

As used herein, the term “mAChR M₁ receptor neutral allosteric ligand” refers to any exogenously administered compound or agent that binds to an allosteric site without affecting the binding or function of agonists or the natural ligand at the orthosteric site in an animal, in particular a mammal, for example a human. However, a neutral allosteric ligand can block the action of other allosteric modulators that act via the same site.

As used herein, the term “subject” can be a vertebrate, such as a mammal, a fish, a bird, a reptile, or an amphibian. Thus, the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non-human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig or rodent. The term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered. In one aspect, the subject is a mammal. A patient refers to a subject afflicted with a disease or disorder. The term “patient” includes human and veterinary subjects. In some aspects of the disclosed methods, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of one or more neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for positive allosteric modulation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for partial agonism of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder, e.g., schizophrenia, Alzheimer's disease, a cognitive disorder, or neuropathic pain prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been identified with a disorder treatable by activation of the mAChR M₁ receptor and/or or a need for activation/agonism of mAChR M₁ activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been identified with anxiety or a related disorder prior to the administering step. In one aspect, a subject can be treated prophylactically with a compound or composition disclosed herein, as discussed herein elsewhere.

As used herein, the term “treatment” refers to the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder. This term includes active treatment, that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder, and also includes causal treatment, that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. In addition, this term includes palliative treatment, that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder; preventative treatment, that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder; and supportive treatment, that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. In various aspects, the term covers any treatment of a subject, including a mammal (e.g., a human), and includes: (i) preventing the disease from occurring in a subject that can be predisposed to the disease but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, i.e., arresting its development; or (iii) relieving the disease, i.e., causing regression of the disease. In one aspect, the subject is a mammal such as a primate, and, in a further aspect, the subject is a human. The term. “subject” also includes domesticated animals (e.g., cats, dogs, etc.), livestock (e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.), and laboratory animals (e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, fruit fly, etc.).

As used herein, the term “prevent” or “preventing” refers to precluding, averting, obviating, forestalling, stopping, or hindering something from happening, especially by advance action. It is understood that where reduce, inhibit or prevent are used herein, unless specifically indicated otherwise, the use of the other two words is also expressly disclosed.

As used herein, the term “diagnosed” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by the compounds, compositions, or methods disclosed herein. For example, “diagnosed with a disorder treatable by modulation of mAChR M₁” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by a compound or composition that can modulate mAChR M₁. As a further example, “diagnosed with a need for modulation of mAChR M₁” refers to having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition characterized by mAChR M₁ activity. Such a diagnosis can be in reference to a disorder, such as a neurodegenerative disease, and the like, as discussed herein. For example, the term “diagnosed with a need for positive allosteric modulation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity” refers to having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by positive allosteric modulation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity. For example, “diagnosed with a need for partial agonism of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by partial agonism of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity. For example, “diagnosed with a need for treatment of one or more neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with acetylcholine dysfunction” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have one or more neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with acetylcholine dysfunction.

As used herein, the phrase “identified to be in need of treatment for a disorder,” or the like, refers to selection of a subject based upon need for treatment of the disorder. For example, a subject can be identified as having a need for treatment of a disorder (e.g., a disorder related to mAChR M₁ activity) based upon an earlier diagnosis by a person of skill and thereafter subjected to treatment for the disorder. It is contemplated that the identification can, in one aspect, be performed by a person different from the person making the diagnosis. It is also contemplated, in a further aspect, that the administration can be performed by one who subsequently performed the administration.

As used herein, the terms “administering” and “administration” refer to any method of providing a pharmaceutical preparation to a subject. Such methods are well known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, oral administration, transdermal administration, administration by inhalation, nasal administration, topical administration, intravaginal administration, ophthalmic administration, intraaural administration, intracerebral administration, rectal administration, sublingual administration, buccal administration, and parenteral administration, including injectable such as intravenous administration, intra-arterial administration, intramuscular administration, and subcutaneous administration. Administration can be continuous or intermittent. In various aspects, a preparation can be administered therapeutically; that is, administered to treat an existing disease or condition. In further various aspects, a preparation can be administered prophylactically; that is, administered for prevention of a disease or condition.

The term “contacting” as used herein refers to bringing a disclosed compound and a cell, a target receptor (e.g. a muscarinic acetylcholine receptor), or other biological entity together in such a manner that the compound can affect the activity of the target, either directly; i.e., by interacting with the target itself, or indirectly; i.e., by interacting with another molecule, co-factor, factor, or protein on which the activity of the target is dependent.

As used herein, the terms “effective amount” and “amount effective” refer to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired result or to have an effect on an undesired condition. For example, a “therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired therapeutic result or to have an effect on undesired symptoms, but is generally insufficient to cause adverse side effects. The specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration; the route of administration; the rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed and like factors well known in the medical arts. For example, it is well within the skill of the art to start doses of a compound at levels lower than those required to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and to gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. If desired, the effective daily dose can be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration. Consequently, single dose compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. The dosage can be adjusted by the individual physician in the event of any contraindications. Dosage can vary, and can be administered in one or more dose administrations daily, for one or several days. Guidance can be found in the literature for appropriate dosages for given classes of pharmaceutical products. In further various aspects, a preparation can be administered in a “prophylactically effective amount”; that is, an amount effective for prevention of a disease or condition.

As used herein, “kit” means a collection of at least two components constituting the kit. Together, the components constitute a functional unit for a given purpose. Individual member components may be physically packaged together or separately. For example, a kit comprising an instruction for using the kit may or may not physically include the instruction with other individual member components. Instead, the instruction can be supplied as a separate member component, either in a paper form or an electronic form which may be supplied on computer readable memory device or downloaded from an internet website, or as recorded presentation.

As used herein, “instruction(s)” means documents describing relevant materials or methodologies pertaining to a kit. These materials may include any combination of the following: background information, list of components and their availability information (purchase information, etc.), brief or detailed protocols for using the kit, trouble-shooting, references, technical support, and any other related documents. Instructions can be supplied with the kit or as a separate member component, either as a paper form or an electronic form which may be supplied on computer readable memory device or downloaded from an internet website, or as recorded presentation. Instructions can comprise one or multiple documents, and are meant to include future updates.

As used herein, the terms “therapeutic agent” include any synthetic or naturally occurring biologically active compound or composition of matter which, when administered to an organism (human or nonhuman animal), induces a desired pharmacologic, immunogenic, and/or physiologic effect by local and/or systemic action. The term therefore encompasses those compounds or chemicals traditionally regarded as drugs, vaccines, and biopharmaceuticals including molecules such as proteins, peptides, hormones, nucleic acids, gene constructs and the like. Examples of therapeutic agents are described in well-known literature references such as the Merck Index (14^(th) edition), the Physicians' Desk Reference (64^(th) edition), and The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics (12^(th) edition), and they include, without limitation, medicaments; vitamins; mineral supplements; substances used for the treatment, prevention, diagnosis, cure or mitigation of a disease or illness; substances that affect the structure or function of the body, or pro-drugs, which become biologically active or more active after they have been placed in a physiological environment. For example, the term “therapeutic agent” includes compounds or compositions for use in all of the major therapeutic areas including, but not limited to, adjuvants; anti-infectives such as antibiotics and antiviral agents; analgesics and analgesic combinations, anorexics, anti-inflammatory agents, anti-epileptics, local and general anesthetics, hypnotics, sedatives, antipsychotic agents, neuroleptic agents, antidepressants, anxiolytics, antagonists, neuron blocking agents, anticholinergic and cholinomimetic agents, antimuscarinic and muscarinic agents, antiadrenergics, antiarrhythmics, antihypertensive agents, hormones, and nutrients, antiarthritics, antiasthmatic agents, anticonvulsants, antihistamines, antinauseants, antineoplastics, antipruritics, antipyretics; antispasmodics, cardiovascular preparations (including calcium channel blockers, beta-blockers, beta-agonists and antiarrhythmics), antihypertensives, diuretics, vasodilators; central nervous system stimulants; cough and cold preparations; decongestants; diagnostics; hormones; bone growth stimulants and bone resorption inhibitors; immunosuppressives; muscle relaxants; psychostimulants; sedatives; tranquilizers; proteins, peptides, and fragments thereof (whether naturally occurring, chemically synthesized or recombinantly produced); and nucleic acid molecules (polymeric forms of two or more nucleotides, either ribonucleotides (RNA) or deoxyribonucleotides (DNA) including both double- and single-stranded molecules, gene constructs, expression vectors, antisense molecules and the like), small molecules (e.g., doxorubicin) and other biologically active macromolecules such as, for example, proteins and enzymes. The agent may be a biologically active agent used in medical, including veterinary, applications and in agriculture, such as with plants, as well as other areas. The term therapeutic agent also includes without limitation, medicaments; vitamins; mineral supplements; substances used for the treatment, prevention, diagnosis, cure or mitigation of disease or illness; or substances which affect the structure or function of the body; or pro-drugs, which become biologically active or more active after they have been placed in a predetermined physiological environment.

As used herein, “EC₅₀,” is intended to refer to the concentration of a substance (e.g., a compound or a drug) that is required for 50% activation or enhancement of a biological process, or component of a process, including a protein, subunit, organelle, ribonucleoprotein, etc. For example, EC₅₀ can refer to the concentration of agonist that provokes a response halfway between the baseline and maximum response in an in vitro assay. Such in vitro assay systems frequently utilize a cell line that either expresses endogenously a target of interest, or has been transfected with a suitable expression vector that directs expression of a recombinant form of the target. For example, the EC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ can be determined using Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with human mAChR M₁. Alternatively, the EC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ can be determined using Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with rat mAChR M₁. In another example, the EC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ can be determined using Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with a mammalian mAChR M₁.

As used herein, “IC₅₀,” is intended to refer to the concentration of a substance (e.g., a compound or a drug) that is required for 50% inhibition of a biological process, or component of a process, including a protein, subunit, organelle, ribonucleoprotein, etc. For example, IC₅₀ refers to the half maximal (50%) inhibitory concentration (IC) of a substance as determined in a suitable assay. For example, an IC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ receptor can be determined in an in vitro assay system. Frequently, receptor assays, including suitable assays for mAChR M₁, make use of a suitable cell-line, e.g. a cell line that either expresses endogenously a target of interest, or has been transfected with a suitable expression vector that directs expression of a recombinant form of the target such as mAChR M₁. For example, the IC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ can be determined using Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with human mAChR M₁. Alternatively, the IC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ can be determined using Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with rat mAChR M₁. In another example, the IC₅₀ for mAChR M₁ can be determined using Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with a mammalian mAChR M₁.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” describes a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e., without causing an unacceptable level of undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner.

As used herein, the term “derivative” refers to a compound having a structure derived from the structure of a parent compound (e.g., a compound disclosed herein) and whose structure is sufficiently similar to those disclosed herein and based upon that similarity, would be expected by one skilled in the art to exhibit the same or similar activities and utilities as the claimed compounds, or to induce, as a precursor, the same or similar activities and utilities as the claimed compounds. Exemplary derivatives include salts, esters, amides, salts of esters or amides, and N-oxides of a parent compound.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use. Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol and the like), carboxymethylcellulose and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions and by the use of surfactants. These compositions can also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents such as paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid and the like. It can also be desirable to include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride and the like. Prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the inclusion of agents, such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin, which delay absorption. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide, poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues. The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable media just prior to use. Suitable inert carriers can include sugars such as lactose. Desirably, at least 95% by weight of the particles of the active ingredient have an effective particle size in the range of 0.01 to 10 micrometers.

A residue of a chemical species, as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to the moiety that is the resulting product of the chemical species in a particular reaction scheme or subsequent formulation or chemical product, regardless of whether the moiety is actually obtained from the chemical species. Thus, an ethylene glycol residue in a polyester refers to one or more —OCH₂CH₂O— units in the polyester, regardless of whether ethylene glycol was used to prepare the polyester. Similarly, a sebacic acid residue in a polyester refers to one or more —CO(CH₂)₈CO— moieties in the polyester, regardless of whether the residue is obtained by reacting sebacic acid or an ester thereof to obtain the polyester.

As used herein, the term “substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, and aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described below. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this disclosure, the heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, can have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. This disclosure is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds. Also, the terms “substitution” or “substituted with” include the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound that does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. It is also contemplated that, in certain aspects, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e., further substituted or unsubstituted).

Inn defining various terms, “A¹,” “A²,” “A³,” and “A⁴” are used herein as generic symbols to represent various specific substituents. These symbols can be any substituent, not limited to those disclosed herein, and when they are defined to be certain substituents in one instance, they can, in another instance, be defined as some other substituents.

The term “aliphatic” or “aliphatic group”, as used herein, denotes a hydrocarbon moiety that may be straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), branched, or cyclic (including fused, bridging, and spirofused polycyclic) and may be completely saturated or may contain one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-20 carbon atoms. Aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups, and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.

The term “alkyl” as used herein is a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, s-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl, and the like. The alkyl group is acyclic. The alkyl group can be branched or unbranched. The alkyl group can also be substituted or unsubstituted. For example, the alkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein. A “lower alkyl” group is an alkyl group containing from one to six (e.g., from one to four) carbon atoms.

Throughout the specification “alkyl” is generally used to refer to both unsubstituted alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups; however, substituted alkyl groups are also specifically referred to herein by identifying the specific substituent(s) on the alkyl group. For example, the term “halogenated alkyl” or “haloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halide, e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. The term “alkoxyalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more alkoxy groups, as described below. The term “alkylamino” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more amino groups, as described below, and the like. When “alkyl” is used in one instance and a specific term such as “alkylalcohol” is used in another, it is not meant to imply that the term “alkyl” does not also refer to specific terms such as “alkylalcohol” and the like.

This practice is also used for other groups described herein. That is, while a term such as “cycloalkyl” refers to both unsubstituted and substituted cycloalkyl moieties, the substituted moieties can, in addition, be specifically identified herein; for example, a particular substituted cycloalkyl can be referred to as, e.g., an “alkylcycloalkyl.” Similarly, a substituted alkoxy can be specifically referred to as, e.g., a “halogenated alkoxy,” a particular substituted alkenyl can be, e.g., an “alkenylalcohol,” and the like. Again, the practice of using a general term, such as “cycloalkyl,” and a specific term, such as “alkylcycloalkyl,” is not meant to imply that the general term does not also include the specific term.

The term “cycloalkyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least three carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, norbornyl, and the like. The term “heterocycloalkyl” is a type of cycloalkyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. The cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.

The term “polyalkylene group” as used herein is a group having two or more CH₂ groups linked to one another. The polyalkylene group can be represented by the formula —(CH₂)_(a)—, where “a” is an integer of from 2 to 500.

The terms “alkoxy” and “alkoxyl” as used herein to refer to an alkyl or cycloalkyl group bonded through an ether linkage; that is, an “alkoxy” group can be defined as —OA¹ where A¹ is alkyl or cycloalkyl as defined above. “Alkoxy” also includes polymers of alkoxy groups as just described; that is, an alkoxy can be a polyether such as —OA¹-OA² or —OA¹-(OA²)_(a)-OA³, where “a” is an integer of from 1 to 200 and A¹, A², and A³ are alkyl and/or cycloalkyl groups.

The term “alkenyl” as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Asymmetric structures such as (A¹A²)C═C(A³A⁴) are intended to include both the E and Z isomers. This can be presumed in structural formulae herein wherein an asymmetric alkene is present, or it can be explicitly indicated by the bond symbol C═C. The alkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.

The term “cycloalkenyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least three carbon atoms and containing at least one carbon-carbon double bound, i.e., C═C. Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenvl, cvclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, norbornenyl, and the like. The term “heterocycloalkenyl” is a type of cycloalkenyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkenyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. The cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.

The term “alkynyl” as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. The alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.

The term “cycloalkynyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least seven carbon atoms and containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bound. Examples of cycloalkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, cycloheptynyl, cyclooctynyl, cyclononynyl, and the like. The term “heterocycloalkynyl” is a type of cycloalkenyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkynyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. The cycloalkynyl group and heterocycloalkynyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The cycloalkynyl group and heterocycloalkynyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.

The term “aromatic group” as used herein refers to a ring structure having cyclic clouds of delocalized π electrons above and below the plane of the molecule, where the π clouds contain (4n+2) π electrons. A further discussion of aromaticity is found in Morrison and Boyd, Organic Chemistry, (5th Ed., 1987), Chapter 13, entitled “Aromaticity,” pages 477-497, incorporated herein by reference. The term “aromatic group” is inclusive of both aryl and heteroaryl groups.

The term “aryl” as used herein is a group that contains any carbon-based aromatic group including, but not limited to, benzene, naphthalene, phenyl, biphenyl, anthracene, and the like. The aryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The aryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein. The term “biaryl” is a specific type of aryl group and is included in the definition of “aryl.” Biaryl refers to two aryl groups that are bound together via a fused ring structure, as in naphthalene, or are attached via one or more carbon-carbon bonds, as in biphenyl.

The term “aldehyde” as used herein is represented by the formula —C(O)H. Throughout this specification “C(O)” is a short hand notation for a carbonyl group, i.e., C═O.

The terms “amine” or “amino” as used herein are represented by the formula —NA¹A², where A¹ and A² can be, independently, hydrogen or alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. A specific example of amino is —NH2.

The term “alkylamino” as used herein is represented by the formula —NH-alkyl) where alkyl is a described herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, isopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, (sec-butyl)amino group, (tert-butyl)amino group, pentylamino group, isopentylamino group, (tert-pentyl)amino group, hexylamino group, and the like.

The term “dialkylamino” as used herein is represented by the formula —N(-alkyl)₂ where alkyl is a described herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, dibutylamino group, diisobutylamino group, di(sec-butyl)amino group, di(tert-butyl)amino group, dipentylamino group, diisopentylamino group, di(tert-pentyl)amino group, dihexylamino group, N-ethyl-N-methylamino group, N-methyl-N-propylamino group, N-ethyl-N-propylamino group and the like.

The term “carboxylic acid” as used herein is represented by the formula —C(O)OH.

The term “ester” as used herein is represented by the formula —OC(O)A¹ or —C(O)OA¹, where A¹ can be alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term “polyester” as used herein is represented by the formula -(A¹O(O)C-A²-C(O)O)_(a)— or -(A¹O(O)C-A²-OC(O))_(a)—, where A¹ and A² can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and “a” is an integer from 1 to 500. “Polyester” is as the term used to describe a group that is produced by the reaction between a compound having at least two carboxylic acid groups with a compound having at least two hydroxyl groups.

The term “ether” as used herein is represented by the formula A¹OA², where A¹ and A² can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein. The term “polyether” as used herein is represented by the formula -(A¹O-A²O)_(a)—, where A¹ and A² can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and “a” is an integer of from 1 to 500. Examples of polyether groups include polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide, and polybutylene oxide.

The terms “halo,” “halogen” or “halide,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to F, Cl, Br, or I.

The terms “pseudohalide,” “pseudohalogen” or “pseudohalo,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to functional groups that behave substantially similar to halides. Such functional groups include, by way of example, cyano, thiocyanato, azido, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, perfluoroalkyl, and perfluoroalkoxy groups.

The term “heteroalkyl,” as used herein refers to an alkyl group containing at least one heteroatom. Suitable heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, O, N, Si, P and S, wherein the nitrogen, phosphorous and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom is optionally quaternized. Heteroalkyls can be substituted as defined above for alkyl groups.

The term “heteroaryl,” as used herein refers to an aromatic group that has at least one heteroatom incorporated within the ring of the aromatic group. Examples of heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and phosphorus, where N-oxides, sulfur oxides, and dioxides are permissible heteroatom substitutions. The heteroaryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The heteroaryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein. Heteroaryl groups can be monocyclic, or alternatively fused ring systems. Heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, tetrazolyl, thienyl, pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, N-methylpyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pridazinyl, pyrazinyl, benzofuranyl, benzodioxolyl, benzothiophenyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazopyridinyl, pyrazolopyridinyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, 1,2-oxazol-4-yl, 1,2-oxazol-5-yl, 1,3-oxazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl, 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,3-thiazol-4-yl, pyridinyl, and pyrimidin-5-yl.

The terms “heterocycle” or “heterocyclyl,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to single and multi-cyclic aromatic or non-aromatic ring systems in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon. Thus, the term is inclusive of, but not limited to, “heterocycloalkyl,” “heteroaryl,” “bicyclic heterocycle” and “polycyclic heterocycle.” Heterocycle includes pyridine, pyrimidine, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole, including, 1,2,3-oxadiazole, 1,2,5-oxadiazole and 1,3,4-oxadiazole, thiadiazole, including, 1,2,3-thiadiazole, 1,2,5-thiadiazole, and 1,3,4-thiadiazole, triazole, including, 1,2,3-triazole, 1,3,4-triazole, tetrazole, including 1,2,3,4-tetrazole and 1,2,4,5-tetrazole, pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, including 1,2,4-triazine and 1,3,5-triazine, tetrazine, including 1,2,4,5-tetrazine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, azetidine, tetrahydropyran, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and the like.

The term “bicyclic heterocycle” or “bicyclic heterocyclyl,” as used herein refers to a ring system in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon. Bicyclic heterocyclyl encompasses ring systems wherein an aromatic ring is fused with another aromatic ring, or wherein an aromatic ring is fused with a non-aromatic ring. Bicyclic heterocyclyl encompasses ring systems wherein a benzene ring is fused to a 5- or a 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms or wherein a pyridine ring is fused to a 5- or a 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms. Bicyclic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, indolyl, indazolyl, pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridinyl, benzofuranyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, 2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodioxinyl, 3,4-dihydro-2H-chromenyl, 1H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-3-yl; 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-b]pyridin-3-yl; and 1H-pyrazolo[3,2-b]pyridin-3-yl.

The term “heterocycloalkyl” as used herein refers to an aliphatic, partially unsaturated or fully saturated, 3- to 14-membered ring system, including single rings of 3 to 8 atoms and bi- and tricyclic ring systems. The heterocycloalkyl ring-systems include one to four heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, wherein a nitrogen and sulfur heteroatom optionally can be oxidized and a nitrogen heteroatom optionally can be substituted. Representative heterocycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetrahydrofuryl.

The term “hydroxyl” as used herein is represented by the formula —OH.

The term “ketone” as used herein is represented by the formula A¹C(O)A², where A¹ and A² can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.

The term “azide” as used herein is represented by the formula —N₃.

The term “nitro” as used herein is represented by the formula —NO₂.

The term “nitrile” as used herein is represented by the formula —CN.

The term “silyl” as used herein is represented by the formula —SiA¹A²A³, where A¹, A², and A³ can be, independently, hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.

The term “sulfo-oxo” as used herein is represented by the formulas —S(O)A¹, —S(O)₂A¹, —OS(O)₂A¹, or —OS(O)₂OA¹, where A¹ can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. Throughout this specification “S(O)” is a short hand notation for S═O. The term “sulfonyl” is used herein to refer to the sulfo-oxo group represented by the formula —S(O)₂A¹, where A¹ can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term “sulfone” as used herein is represented by the formula A¹S(O)₂A², where A¹ and A² can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term “sulfoxide” as used herein is represented by the formula A'S(O)A², where A¹ and A² can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.

The term “thiol” as used herein is represented by the formula —SH.

“R¹,” “R²,” “R³,” “R^(n),” where n is an integer, as used herein can, independently, possess one or more of the groups listed above. For example, if R¹ is a straight chain alkyl group, one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group can optionally be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a halide, and the like. Depending upon the groups that are selected, a first group can be incorporated within second group or, alternatively, the first group can be pendant (i.e., attached) to the second group. For example, with the phrase “an alkyl group comprising an amino group,” the amino group can be incorporated within the backbone of the alkyl group. Alternatively, the amino group can be attached to the backbone of the alkyl group. The nature of the group(s) that is (are) selected will determine if the first group is embedded or attached to the second group.

As described herein, compounds of the invention may contain “optionally substituted” moieties. In general, the term “substituted,” whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an “optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. In is also contemplated that, in certain aspects, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e., further substituted or unsubstituted).

The term “stable,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain aspects, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.

Suitable monovalent substituents on a substitutable carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group are independently halogen; —(CH₂)₀₋₄Rº, —(CH₂)₀₋₄ORº; —O(CH₂)₀₋₄Rº, —O—(CH₂)₀₋₄C(O)ORº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄CH(ORº)₂; —(CH₂)₀₋₄SRº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄Ph, which may be substituted with Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄O(CH₂)₀₋₁Ph which may be substituted with Rº; —CH═CHPh, which may be substituted with Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄O(CH₂)₀₋₁-pyridyl which may be substituted with Rº; —NO₂; —CN; —N₃; —(CH₂)₀₋₄N(Rº)₂; —(CH₂)₀₋₄N(Rº)C(O)Rº; —N(Rº)C(S)Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄N(Rº)C(O)NRº₂; —N(Rº)C(S)NRº₂; —(CH₂)₀₋₄N(Rº)C(O)ORº; —N(Rº)N(Rº)C(O)Rº; —N(Rº)N(Rº)C(O)NRº₂; —N(Rº)N(Rº)C(O)ORº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄C(O)Rº; —C(S)Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄C(O)ORº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄C(O)SRº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄C(O)OSiRº₃; —(CH₂)₀₋₄OC(O)Rº; —OC(O)(CH₂)₀₋₄SR—, SC(S)SRº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄SC(O)Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄C(O)NRº₂; —C(S)NRº₂; —C(S)SRº; —SC(S)SRº, —(CH₂)₀₋₄OC(O)NRº₂; —C(O)N(ORº)Rº; —C(O)C(O)Rº; —C(O)CH₂C(O)Rº; —C(NORº)Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄SSRº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄S(O)₂Rº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄S(O)₂ORº; —(CH₂)₀₋₄OS(O)₂Rº; —S(O)₂NRº₂; —(CH₂)₀₋₄S(O)Rº; —N(Rº)S(O)₂NRº₂; —N(Rº)S(O)₂Rº; —N(ORº)Rº; —C(NH)NRº₂; —P(O)₂Rº; —P(O)Rº₂; —P(O)Rº₂; —OP(O)(ORº)₂; SiRº₃; —(C₁₋₄ straight or branched alkylene)O—N(Rº)₂; or —(C₁₋₄ straight or branched alkylene)C(O)O—N(Rº)₂, wherein each Rº may be substituted as defined below and is independently hydrogen, C₁₋₆ aliphatic, —CH₂Ph, —O(CH₂)₀₋₁Ph, —CH₂-(5-6 membered heteroaryl ring), or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of Rº, taken together with their intervening atom(s), form a 3-12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, which may be substituted as defined below.

Suitable monovalent substituents on Rº (or the ring formed by taking two independent occurrences of Rº together with their intervening atoms), are independently halogen, —(CH₂)₀₋₂R^(●), -(haloR^(●)), —(CH₂)₀₋₂OH, —(CH₂)₀₋₂OR^(●), —(CH₂)₀₋₂CH(OR^(●))₂; —O(haloR^(●)), —CN, —N₃, —(CH₂)₀₋₂C(O)R^(●), —(CH₂)₀₋₂C(O)OH, —(CH₂)₀₋₂C(O)OR^(●), —(CH₂)₀₋₂SR^(●), —(CH₂)₀₋₂SH, —(CH₂)₀₋₂NH₂, —(CH₂)₀₋₂NHR^(●), —(CH₂)₀₋₂NR^(●) ₂, —NO₂, —SiR^(●) ₃, —OSiR^(●) ₃, —C(O)SR^(●), —(C₁₋₄ straight or branched alkylene)C(O)OR^(●), or —SSR^(●) wherein each R^(●) is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently selected from C₁₋₄ aliphatic, —CH₂Ph, —O(CH₂)₀₋₁Ph, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of R^(●) include ═O and ═S.

Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group include the following: ═O, ═S, ═NNR*₂, ═NNHC(O)R*, ═NNHC(O)OR*, ═NNHS(O)₂R*, ═NR*, ═NOR*, —O(C(R*₂))₂₋₃O—, or —S(C(R*₂))₂₋₃S—, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆ aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an “optionally substituted” group include: —O(CR*₂)₂₋₃O—, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆ aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.

Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R* include halogen, —R^(●), -(haloR^(●)), —OH, —O(haloR^(●)), —CN, —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR^(●), —NH₂, —NHR^(●), —NR^(●) ₂, or —NO₂, wherein each R^(●) is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C₁₋₄ aliphatic, —CH₂Ph, —O(CH₂)₀₋₁Ph, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.

Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an “optionally substituted” group include R†, —NR†₂, —C(O)R†, —C(O)OR†, —C(O)C(O)R†, —C(O)CH₂C(O)R†, —S(O)₂R†, —S(O)₂NR†₂, —C(S)NR†₂, —C(NH)NR†₂, or —N(R†)S(O)₂R†; wherein each R† is independently hydrogen, C₁₋₆ aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted —OPh, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R†, taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3-12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.

Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R† are independently halogen, —R^(●), -(haloR^(●)), —OH, —OR^(●), —O(haloR^(●)), —CN, —C(O)OH, —C(O)O^(●), —NH₂, —NHR^(●), —NR^(●) ₂, or —NO₂, wherein each R^(●) is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C₁₋₄ aliphatic, —CH₂Ph, —O(CH₂)₀₋₁Ph, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.

The term “leaving group” refers to an atom (or a group of atoms) with electron withdrawing ability that can be displaced as a stable species, taking with it the bonding electrons. Examples of suitable leaving groups include halides and sulfonate esters, including, but not limited to, triflate, mesylate, tosylate, brosylate, and halides.

The terms “hydrolysable group” and “hydrolysable moiety” refer to a functional group capable of undergoing hydrolysis, e.g., under basic or acidic conditions. Examples of hydrolysable residues include, without limitation, acid halides, activated carboxylic acids, and various protecting groups known in the art (see, for example, “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis.” T. W. Greene, P. G. M. Wuts, Wiley-Interscience, 1999).

The term “organic residue” defines a carbon containing residue, i.e., a residue comprising at least one carbon atom, and includes but is not limited to the carbon-containing groups, residues, or radicals defined hereinabove. Organic residues can contain various heteroatoms, or be bonded to another molecule through a heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or the like. Examples of organic residues include but are not limited alkyl or substituted alkyls, alkoxy or substituted alkoxy, mono or di-substituted amino, amide groups, etc. Organic residues can preferably comprise 1 to 18 carbon atoms, 1 to 15, carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. In a further aspect, an organic residue can comprise 2 to 18 carbon atoms, 2 to 15, carbon atoms, 2 to 12 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.

A very close synonym of the term “residue” is the term “radical,” which as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to a fragment, group, or substructure of a molecule described herein, regardless of how the molecule is prepared. For example, a 2,4-thiazolidinedione radical in a particular compound has the structure:

regardless of whether thiazolidinedione is used to prepare the compound. In some embodiments the radical (for example an alkyl) can be further modified (i.e., substituted alkyl) by having bonded thereto one or more “substituent radicals.” The number of atoms in a given radical is not critical to the present invention unless it is indicated to the contrary elsewhere herein.

“Organic radicals,” as the term is defined and used herein, contain one or more carbon atoms. An organic radical can have, for example, 1-26 carbon atoms, 1-18 carbon atoms, 1-12 carbon atoms, 1-8 carbon atoms, 1-6 carbon atoms, or 1-4 carbon atoms. In a further aspect, an organic radical can have 2-26 carbon atoms, 2-18 carbon atoms, 2-12 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbon atoms, or 2-4 carbon atoms. Organic radicals often have hydrogen bound to at least some of the carbon atoms of the organic radical. One example, of an organic radical that comprises no inorganic atoms is a 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydro-2-naphthyl radical. In some embodiments, an organic radical can contain 1-10 inorganic heteroatoms bound thereto or therein, including halogens, oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, and the like. Examples of organic radicals include but are not limited to an alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, mono-substituted amino, di-substituted amino, acyloxy, cyano, carboxy, carboalkoxy, alkylcarboxamide, substituted alkylcarboxamide, dialkylcarboxamide, substituted dialkylcarboxamide, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, thioalkyl, thiohaloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, or substituted heterocyclic radicals, wherein the terms are defined elsewhere herein. A few non-limiting examples of organic radicals that include heteroatoms include alkoxy radicals, trifluoromethoxy radicals, acetoxy radicals, dimethylamino radicals and the like.

“Inorganic radicals,” as the term is defined and used herein, contain no carbon atoms and therefore comprise only atoms other than carbon. Inorganic radicals comprise bonded combinations of atoms selected from hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, and halogens such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, which can be present individually or bonded together in their chemically stable combinations. Inorganic radicals have 10 or fewer, or preferably one to six or one to four inorganic atoms as listed above bonded together. Examples of inorganic radicals include, but not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halogens, nitro, thiol, sulfate, phosphate, and like commonly known inorganic radicals. The inorganic radicals do not have bonded therein the metallic elements of the periodic table (such as the alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, transition metals, lanthanide metals, or actinide metals), although such metal ions can sometimes serve as a pharmaceutically acceptable cation for anionic inorganic radicals such as a sulfate, phosphate, or like anionic inorganic radical. Inorganic radicals do not comprise metalloids elements such as boron, aluminum, gallium, germanium, arsenic, tin, lead, or tellurium, or the noble gas elements, unless otherwise specifically indicated elsewhere herein.

Compounds described herein can contain one or more double bonds and, thus, potentially give rise to cis/trans (E/Z) isomers, as well as other conformational isomers. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible isomers, as well as mixtures of such isomers.

Unless stated to the contrary, a formula with chemical bonds shown only as solid lines and not as wedges or dashed lines contemplates each possible isomer, e.g., each enantiomer and diastereomer, and a mixture of isomers, such as a racemic or scalemic mixture. Compounds described herein can contain one or more asymmetric centers and, thus, potentially give rise to diastereomers and optical isomers. Unless stated to the contrary, the present invention includes all such possible diastereomers as well as their racemic mixtures, their substantially pure resolved enantiomers, all possible geometric isomers, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Mixtures of stereoisomers, as well as isolated specific stereoisomers, are also included. During the course of the synthetic procedures used to prepare such compounds, or in using racemization or epimerization procedures known to those skilled in the art, the products of such procedures can be a mixture of stereoisomers.

Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms having the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1 or (+) and (−) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (−) or meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these compounds, called stereoisomers, are identical except that they are non-superimposable mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture. Many of the compounds described herein can have one or more chiral centers and therefore can exist in different enantiomeric forms. If desired, a chiral carbon can be designated with an asterisk (*). When bonds to the chiral carbon are depicted as straight lines in the disclosed formulas, it is understood that both the (R) and (S) configurations of the chiral carbon, and hence both enantiomers and mixtures thereof, are embraced within the formula. As is used in the art, when it is desired to specify the absolute configuration about a chiral carbon, one of the bonds to the chiral carbon can be depicted as a wedge (bonds to atoms above the plane) and the other can be depicted as a series or wedge of short parallel lines is (bonds to atoms below the plane). The Cahn-Inglod-Prelog system can be used to assign the (R) or (S) configuration to a chiral carbon.

Compounds described herein comprise atoms in both their natural isotopic abundance and in non-natural abundance. The disclosed compounds can be isotopically-labeled or isotopically-substituted compounds identical to those described, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number typically found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as ²H, ³H, ¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹⁵N, ¹⁸O, ¹⁷O, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F and ³⁶Cl, respectively. Compounds further comprise prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of said compounds or of said prodrugs which contain the aforementioned isotopes and/or other isotopes of other atoms are within the scope of this invention. Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of the present invention, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as ³H and ¹⁴C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated, i.e., ³H, and carbon-14, i.e., ¹⁴C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., ²H, can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances. Isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.

The compounds described in the invention can be present as a solvate. In some cases, the solvent used to prepare the solvate is an aqueous solution, and the solvate is then often referred to as a hydrate. The compounds can be present as a hydrate, which can be obtained, for example, by crystallization from a solvent or from aqueous solution. In this connection, one, two, three or any arbitrary number of solvate or water molecules can combine with the compounds according to the invention to form solvates and hydrates. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible solvates.

The term “co-crystal” means a physical association of two or more molecules which owe their stability through non-covalent interaction. One or more components of this molecular complex provide a stable framework in the crystalline lattice. In certain instances, the guest molecules are incorporated in the crystalline lattice as anhydrates or solvates, see e.g., “Crystal Engineering of the Composition of Pharmaceutical Phases. Do Pharmaceutical Co-crystals Represent a New Path to Improved Medicines?” Almarasson, O., et al., The Royal Society of Chemistry, 1889-1896, 2004. Examples of co-crystals include p-toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid.

It is also appreciated that certain compounds described herein can be present as an equilibrium of tautomers. For example, ketones with an α-hydrogen can exist in an equilibrium of the keto form and the enol form.

Likewise, amides with an N-hydrogen can exist in an equilibrium of the amide form and the imidic acid form. As another example, pyrazoles can exist in two tautomeric forms, N¹-unsubstituted, 3-R³ and N¹-unsubstituted, 5-R³ as shown below.

Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible tautomers.

It is known that chemical substances form solids which are present in different states of order which are termed polymorphic forms or modifications. The different modifications of a polymorphic substance can differ greatly in their physical properties. The compounds according to the invention can be present in different polymorphic forms, with it being possible for particular modifications to be metastable. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible polymorphic forms.

In some aspects, a structure of a compound can be represented by a formula:

which is understood to be equivalent to a formula:

wherein n is typically an integer. That is, R^(n) is understood to represent five independent substituents, R^(n(a)), R^(n(b)), R^(n(c)), R^(n(d)), and R^(n(e)). By “independent substituents,” it is meant that each R substituent can be independently defined. For example, if in one instance R^(n(a)) is halogen, then R^(n(b)) is not necessarily halogen in that instance.

Certain materials, compounds, compositions, and components disclosed herein can be obtained commercially or readily synthesized using techniques generally known to those of skill in the art. For example, the starting materials and reagents used in preparing the disclosed compounds and compositions are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wis.), Acros Organics (Morris Plains. N.J.), Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.), or Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.) or are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-17 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and Supplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989); Organic Reactions, Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); March's Advanced Organic Chemistry, (John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition); and Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989).

Unless otherwise expressly stated, it is in no way intended that any method set forth herein be construed as requiring that its steps be performed in a specific order. Accordingly, where a method claim does not actually recite an order to be followed by its steps or it is not otherwise specifically stated in the claims or descriptions that the steps are to be limited to a specific order, it is no way intended that an order be inferred, in any respect. This holds for any possible non-express basis for interpretation, including: matters of logic with respect to arrangement of steps or operational flow; plain meaning derived from grammatical organization or punctuation; and the number or type of embodiments described in the specification.

Disclosed are the components to be used to prepare the compositions of the invention as well as the compositions themselves to be used within the methods disclosed herein. These and other materials are disclosed herein, and it is understood that when combinations, subsets, interactions, groups, etc. of these materials are disclosed that while specific reference of each various individual and collective combinations and permutation of these compounds cannot be explicitly disclosed, each is specifically contemplated and described herein. For example, if a particular compound is disclosed and discussed and a number of modifications that can be made to a number of molecules including the compounds are discussed, specifically contemplated is each and every combination and permutation of the compound and the modifications that are possible unless specifically indicated to the contrary. Thus, if a class of molecules A, B, and C are disclosed as well as a class of molecules D, E, and F and an example of a combination molecule, A-D is disclosed, then even if each is not individually recited each is individually and collectively contemplated meaning combinations, A-E, A-F, B-D, B-E, B-F, C-D, C-E, and C-F are considered disclosed. Likewise, any subset or combination of these is also disclosed. Thus, for example, the sub-group of A-E, B-F, and C-E would be considered disclosed. This concept applies to all aspects of this application including, but not limited to, steps in methods of making and using the compositions of the invention. Thus, if there are a variety of additional steps that can be performed it is understood that each of these additional steps can be performed with any specific embodiment or combination of embodiments of the methods of the invention.

It is understood that the compositions disclosed herein have certain functions. Disclosed herein are certain structural requirements for performing the disclosed functions, and it is understood that there are a variety of structures that can perform the same function that are related to the disclosed structures, and that these structures will typically achieve the same result.

B. Compounds

In one aspect, the invention relates to compounds useful as positive allosteric modulators of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M₁ (mAChR M₁). More specifically, in one aspect, the present invention relates to compounds that allosterically modulate mAChR M₁ receptor activity, affecting the sensitivity of mAChR M₁ receptors to agonists without acting as orthosteric agonists themselves. The compounds can, in one aspect, exhibit subtype selectivity.

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine as an increase in response to non-maximal concentrations of acetylcholine in Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells transfected with rat mAChR M₁ in the presence of the compound, compared to the response to acetylcholine in the absence of the compound. In further aspect, the Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells are transfected with human mAChR M₁. In yet a further aspect, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells are transfected with mAChR M₁ of a mammal.

In one aspect, the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction and other diseases in which muscarinic acetylcholine receptors are involved, as further described herein.

It is contemplated that each disclosed derivative can be optionally further substituted. It is also contemplated that any one or more derivative can be optionally omitted from the invention. It is understood that a disclosed compound can be provided by the disclosed methods. It is also understood that the disclosed compounds can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.

1. Structure

Disclosed are compounds represented by a formula:

wherein Q is N or CR^(3a); wherein Z is N or CR^(3b), provided that Q and Z are not simultaneously N; wherein V is N or CR^(3c), provided that when V is CR^(3c), then Q and Z are, respectively, CR^(3a) and CR^(3b); wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino and C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, and C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(2a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₁₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN, wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F. —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH_(L), —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen, and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein each of R^(20a) and R^(20e) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃.

-   -   CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20b), R^(20c),         R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl,         C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3         alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5         heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the         remaining R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen;         and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a         pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In a further aspect, a compound has a structure selected from:

wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein 0 or 1 of R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein each of the remaining R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen; and wherein all other variables are as defined herein; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

a. Q GROUPS

In one aspect, Q is N or CR^(3a). In a further aspect, Q is N. In a still further aspect, Q is CR^(3a).

b. V Groups

In one aspect, V is N or CR^(3c), provided that when V is CR^(3c), then Q and Z are, respectively, CR^(3a) and CR^(3b). In a further aspect, V is N. In a still further aspect, V is CR^(3c), provided that when V is CR^(3c), then Q and Z are, respectively, CR^(3a) and CR^(3b).

c. Z Groups

In one aspect, Z is N or CR^(3b), provided that Q and Z are not simultaneously N. In a further aspect Z is N, provided that Q and Z are not simultaneously N. In a still further aspect, Z is CR^(3b).

d. R^(1A) and R^(1b) Groups

In one aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a further aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen or CH₃. In a still further aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen or —CH₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen or —CH₂F. In an even further aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen or —CHF₂. In an even further aspect, each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen, and R^(1b) is —CH₃. In a still further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen, and R^(1b) is —CF₃. In a yet further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen, and R^(1b) is —CH₂F. In a yet further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen, and R^(1b) is —CHF₂.

In a further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen, and R^(1b) is —CH₃. In a still further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen, and R^(1a) is —CF₃. In a yet further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen, and R^(1a) is —CH₂F. In a yet further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen, and R^(1a) is —CHF₂.

In a further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(1a) is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(1a) is-CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(1a) is-CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(1a) is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(1a) is hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(1b) is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(1b) is —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(1b) is-CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(1b) is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(1b) is hydrogen or —CF₃.

e. R^(2a) and R^(2b) Groups

In one aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a further aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen or CH₃. In a still further aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen or —CH₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen or —CH₂F. In an even further aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen or —CHF₂. In an even further aspect, each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(2n) is hydrogen, and R^(2b) is —CH₃. In a still further aspect, R^(2n) is hydrogen, and R^(2b) is —CF₃. In a yet further aspect, R^(2a) is hydrogen, and R^(2b) is —CH₂F. In a yet further aspect, R^(2a) is hydrogen, and R^(2b) is —CHF₂.

In a further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen, and R^(2a) is —CH₃. In a still further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen, and R^(2a) is —CF₃. In a yet further aspect. R^(2b) is hydrogen, and R^(2a) is —CH₂F. In a yet further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen, and R^(2a) is —CHF₂.

In a further aspect, R^(2a) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(2a) is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(2a) is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(2a) is —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(2a) is —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(2a) is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(2n) is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(2n) is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(2a) is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(2a) is hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(2b) is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(2b) is —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(2b) is —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(2b) is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(2b) is hydrogen or —CF₃.

f. R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c) Groups

In one aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a further aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen or CH₃. In a still further aspect, each of R^(3n), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen or —CH₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen or —CH₂F. In an even further aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen or —CH₂F. In an even further aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen, and R^(3c), when present, is —CH₃. In a still further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen, and R^(3b), when present, is —CH₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(3b) and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen, and R^(3a), when present, is —CH₃.

In a further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen, and R^(3c), when present, is —CF₃. In a still further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen, and R^(3b), when present, is —CF₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(3b) and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen, and R^(3a), when present, is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3b), when present, is —CH₃, and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen. In a still further aspect, each of R^(3b) and R^(3c), when present, is —CH₃, and R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(3b) and R^(3c), when present, is —CH₃, and R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3b), when present, is —CF₃, and R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen. In a still further aspect, each of R^(3a) and R^(3c), when present, is —CF₃, and R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(3b) and R^(3c), when present, is —CF₃, and R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(3a), when present, is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(3b), when present, is hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is —CF₃.

In a further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen or —CH₃. In an even further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen or —CH₂F. In a still further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a yet further aspect, R^(3c), when present, is hydrogen or —CF₃.

g. R⁶ Groups

In one aspect, R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino and C1-C3 dialkylamino. In a further aspect, R⁶, when present, is C1-C3 alkylamino. In a still further aspect, R⁶, when present, is C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, R⁶, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, and —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃. In a still further aspect, R⁶, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃ and —N(CH₃)₂.

In a further aspect, R⁶, when present, is —NHCH₃. In a still further aspect, R⁶, when present, is —N(CH₃)₂. In a yet further aspect, R⁶, when present, is NHCH₂CH₃. In an even further aspect, R⁶, when present, is —N(CH₂CH₃)₂. In a still further aspect, R⁶, when present, is —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃.

h. R⁷ Groups

In one aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl.

In a further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F. —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, aziridinyl, oxiranyl, thiiranyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, tetrahydro-2H-thiopyranyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, and piperazinyl. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, methyl, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, aziridinyl, oxiranyl, thiiranyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, tetrahydro-2H-thiopyranyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, and piperazinyl.

In a further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, methyl, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl.

In a further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, and —CH₂CCl₃. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, methyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, and —CCl₃. In a yet further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, methyl. —CH₂F, —CHF₂, and —CF₃.

In one aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino and C1-C3 dialkylamino. In a further aspect, R⁷, when present, is C1-C3 alkylamino. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂. —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, and —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is selected from —NHCH₃ and —N(CH₃)₂.

In a further aspect, R⁷, when present, is —NHCH₃. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is —N(CH₃)₂. In a yet further aspect, R⁷, when present, is —NHCH₂CH₃. In an even further aspect, R⁷, when present, is —N(CH₂CH₃)₂. In a still further aspect, R⁷, when present, is —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃.

i. R^(10a) and R^(10b) Groups

In one aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen or fluorine. In a still further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen or —CH₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen or —CH₂F. In an even further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen or —CHF₂. In a still further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen or —CF₃.

In a further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃. In a still further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃. In a yet further aspect, each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, or —CF₃.

j. R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) Groups

In one aspect, 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl. Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; and each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) is hydrogen. In a still further aspect, each of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen or halogen, provided that no more than two of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) are halogen. In a still further aspect, each of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen or fluoro, provided that no more than two of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) are fluoro.

In a further aspect, one of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is Ar², and each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen. In a still further aspect, 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is halogen; one of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is Ar², and each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen. In a yet further aspect, 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is fluoro; one of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is Ar², and each of the remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, 1 or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; and each remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino. C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; and each remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, one of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; and each remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, two of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) are independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷; and each remaining R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) and R^(20e) is hydrogen.

k. R^(30A), R^(30B), R^(30C), R^(30D), R^(30E), AND R^(30F) GROUPS

In one aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) are not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, —OCH₃, —OCH₂CH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, and —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) are not hydrogen. In a still further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, methyl, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —OCH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, and —N(CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) are not hydrogen.

In one aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is hydrogen, and no more than one of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen; and R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen and C1-C3 alkyl. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₁CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, —OCH₃, —OCH₂CH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, and —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is hydrogen, and no more than one of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen. In a still further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, methyl, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —OCH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, and —N(CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is hydrogen, and no more than one of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen.

In one aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, —OCH₃, —OCH₂CH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, and —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, methyl, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —OCH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, and —N(CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen.

In one aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) are not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, —OCH₃, —OCH₂CH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, and —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) are not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(3a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, methyl, —CRY, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —OCH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, and —N(CH₃)₂, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) are not hydrogen.

In one aspect, each of R^(30a) and R^(30b) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that both of R^(30a) and R^(30b) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a) and R^(30b) is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, each of R^(30a) and R^(30b) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, .methyl, ethyl, —CH₂F, —CH₂Cl, —CH₂CH₂F, —CH₂CH₂Cl, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —CH₂CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CH₂CHCl₂, —CH₂CCl₃, —OCH₃, —OCH₂CH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, —NHCH₂CH₃, —N(CH₃)₂, —N(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, and —N(CH₂CH₃)₂, provided that both of R^(30a) and R^(30b) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen. In a further aspect, each of R^(30a) and R^(30b) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, methyl, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, —CHCl₂, —CCl₃, —OCH₃, cyclopropyl, —NHCH₃, and —N(CH₃)₂, provided that both of R^(30a) and R^(30b) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen.

I. R⁴⁰ GROUPS

In one aspect, R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen and C1-C3 alkyl. In a further aspect, R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen. In a still further aspect, R⁴⁰ is methyl. In a yet further aspect, R⁴⁰ is ethyl.

In a further aspect, R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen, methyl, and ethyl. In a still further aspect, R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen and methyl. In a yet further aspect R⁴⁰ is selected from methyl, ethyl, propyl, and isopropyl.

m. R^(50A) AND R^(50B) GROUPS

In one aspect, each of R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C8 alkyl; or R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, are optionally covalently bonded and, together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached, comprise a 4- to 6-membered heterocycle. In a further aspect, each of R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, is hydrogen.

In a further aspect, R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, and tert-butyl.

In a further aspect, R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, are optionally covalently bonded and, together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached, comprise a 4- to 6-membered heterocycle having a structure represented by a formula:

n. AR¹ GROUPS

In one aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In a further aspect, Ar¹ is an unsubstituted aryl or heteroaryl.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and −CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₃, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Are group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar¹ group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with a halogen group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar¹ group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein the aryl or heteroaryl has 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 1 or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein the aryl or heteroaryl has 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with a fluoro group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar¹ group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein the aryl or heteroaryl has 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar¹ group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen. —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar¹ group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein the aryl or heteroaryl has 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with a halogen group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group.

In a further aspect. Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with a fluoro group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar² group. In an even further aspect. Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with 0 or 1 Ar¹ group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with two groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with two groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar¹ group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is acyl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with a halogen group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In an even further aspect, AP is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with two halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 fluoro groups; and AP is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with 1 or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with a fluoro group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is substituted with two fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-CG cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one group selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, and SO₂R⁷.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar¹ group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein the aryl or heteroaryl has 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with a halogen group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 2 halogen groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group.

In a further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one 1 Ar² group. In a still further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 1 or 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In a yet further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with a fluoro group; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group. In an even further aspect, Ar¹ is phenyl substituted with 2 fluoro groups; and Ar¹ is further substituted with one Ar² group.

o. Ar² GROUPS

In one aspect, Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino. In a further aspect, Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and is unsubstituted.

In a further aspect, Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect. Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with one group selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure and substituted with two groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is hydrogen, and no more than one of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen; and R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen and C1-C3 alkyl.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is hydrogen, and no more than one of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen; and R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen and C1-C3 alkyl.

In a further aspect. Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), and R^(30d) are not hydrogen.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a) and R^(30b) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that both of R^(30a) and R^(30b) are not hydrogen when R⁴⁰ is not hydrogen; and R⁴⁰ is selected from hydrogen and C1-C3 alkyl.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), and R^(30c) are not hydrogen.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30a), and R^(30b) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(30b), and R^(30c) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c)R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c)R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) are not hydrogen.

In a further aspect, Ar² has structure represented by a formula:

each of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, —CN, C1-C3 allyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, and C1-C3 dialkylamino, provided that no more than two of R^(30a), R^(30b), R^(30c), R^(30d), R^(30e), and R^(30f) are not hydrogen.

p. Leaving Groups

In one aspect, leaving groups can be selected from halogens. In a further aspect, a halogen is fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo. In a still further aspect, halogen is fluoro, chloro, or bromo. In a yet further aspect, halogen is fluoro or chloro. In a further aspect, halogen is fluoro. In an even further aspect, halogen is chloro or bromo. In an even further aspect, halogen is chloro. In a yet further aspect, halogen is iodo. In a still further aspect, halogen is bromo.

In various aspects, leaving groups can be a sulfonate leaving group. In a further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is trifluoromethyl sulfonate (commonly triflate), methyl sulfonate (commonly mesylate), p-tolylsulfonate (commonly tosylate), or benzene sulfonate (commonly besylate). In a still further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is trifluoromethyl sulfonate or methyl sulfonate. In a yet further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is p-tolylsulfonate or benzene sulfonate. In an even further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is trifluoromethyl sulfonate. In a still further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is methyl sulfonate. In a yet further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is p-tolylsulfonate. In an even further aspect, the sulfonate leaving group is benzene sulfonate.

2. Example Compounds

In one aspect, a compound can be present as one or more of the following structures:

It is understood that the disclosed compounds can be used in connection with the disclosed methods, compositions, kits, and uses.

It is understood that pharmaceutical acceptable derivatives of the disclosed compounds can be used also in connection with the disclosed methods, compositions, kits, and uses. The pharmaceutical acceptable derivatives of the compounds can include any suitable derivative, such as pharmaceutically acceptable salts as discussed below, isomers, radiolabeled analogs, tautomers, and the like.

3. Muscarinic Acetylcholine Receptor M₁ Modulation

The human muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M₁ (mAChR M₁) is a protein of 479 amino acids encoded by the CHRM1 gene. The molecular weight of the unglycosylated protein is about 51,421 kDa and it is a transmembrane GPCR. As described above, the mAChR M₁ is a member of the GPCR Class 1 family, or the rhodopsin-like GPCRs, which are characterized by structural features similar to rhodopsin such as seven transmembrane segments. The muscarinic acetylcholine receptors have the N-terminus oriented to the extracellular face of the membrane and the C-terminus located on the cytoplasmic face. The orthosteric binding for natural ligand, acetylcholine, for mAChRs is believed to be located within a pocket located within the transmembrane segments. The binding of ligands to the orthosteric and allosteric sites can be distinguished using methods such as those described herein and a variety of other methods known to one skilled in the art.

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds potentiate the agonist response (e.g., acetylcholine) of mAChR M₁. In a further aspect, the disclosed compounds increase mAChR M₁ response to non-maximal concentrations of agonist in the presence of compound compared to the response to agonist in the absence of compound. The potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity can be demonstrated by methodology known in the art. For example, activation of mAChR M₁ activity can be determined by measurement of calcium flux in response to agonist, e.g. acetylcholine, in cells loaded with a Ca²⁺-sensitive fluorescent dye (e.g., Fluo-4). In a further aspect, the calcium flux was measured as an increase in fluorescent static ratio. In a yet further aspect, positive allosteric modulator activity was analyzed as a concentration-dependent increase in the EC₂₀ acetylcholine response (i.e. the response of mAChR M₁ at a concentration of acetylcholine that yields 20% of the maximal response).

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds activate mAChR M₁ response as an increase in calcium fluorescence in mAChR M₁-transfected CHO-K1 cells in the presence of the compound, compared to the response of equivalent CHO-K1 cells in the absence of the compound. For example, a disclosed compound can have an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM, of less than about 5 μM, of less than about 2.5 μM, of less than about 1 μM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM. In a further aspect, the mAChR M₁-transfected CHO-K1 cells are transfected with human mAChR M₁. In a still further aspect, the mAChR M₁-transfected CHO-K1 cells are transfected with rat mAChR M₁.

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit potentiation of mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine as an increase in response to non-maximal concentrations of acetylcholine in CHO-K1 cells transfected with a mammalian mAChR M₁ in the presence of the compound, compared to the response to acetylcholine in the absence of the compound. For example, CHO-K1 cells can be transfected with human mAChR M₁. For example, CHO-K1 cells can be transfected with rat mAChR M₁. For example, a compound can exhibit positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM, of less than about 5,000 nM, of less than about 2,500 nM, of less than about 1,000 nM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, or of less than about 100 nM. Alternatively, the disclosed compounds exhibit potentiation of mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine as an increase in response to non-maximal concentrations of acetylcholine in CHO-K1 cells transfected with human mAChR M₁ in the presence of the compound, compared to the response to acetylcholine in the absence of the compound. For example, a compound can exhibit positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM, of less than about 5,000 nM. of less than about 2,500 nM, of less than about 1,000 nM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM.

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds are positive allosteric modulators of the mAChR M₁. Thus, the compounds of the invention can bind to the muscarinic receptor, and particularly to muscarinic receptor subtype M₁, which results in an increased efficacy at that receptor for the endogenous agonist. Thus, by positive allosteric modulation, the compounds indirectly activate the muscarinic receptor subtype M₁. In various further aspects, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine as an increase in response to non-maximal concentrations of acetylcholine in CHO-K1 cells transfected with a mAChR M₁ in the presence of the compound, compared to the response to acetylcholine in the absence of the compound. In a yet further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM. In an even further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 5,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 2,500 nM. In a still further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 1,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 500 nM. In a still further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 250 nM. In an even further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit positive allosteric modulation of the mAChR M₁ response to acetylcholine with an EC₅₀ of less than about 100 nM. In a still further aspect, the EC₅₀ for positive allosteric modulation is determined in CHO-K1 cells are transfected with a mAChR M₁. In a yet further aspect, the CHO-K1 cells are transfected with a human mAChR M₁. In a still further aspect, the CHO-K1 cells are transfected with a rat mAChR M₁.

Without wishing to be bound by a particular theory, the disclosed compounds and products of the disclosed methods are believed to bind to an allosteric site distinct from the orthosteric binding site. Further, without wishing to be bound by particular theory, the disclosed compounds and products of the disclosed methods can bind to an allosteric site that comprises portions of one or more extracellular loops and/or transmembrane segments, and is distinct from the orthosteric binding site. In a further aspect, without wishing to be bound by a particular theory, the disclosed compounds and products of the disclosed methods can bind to an allosteric site that comprises portions of one or more intracellular loops and/or transmembrane segments, and is distinct from the orthosteric binding site. In a still further aspect, without wishing to be bound by particular theory, the disclosed compounds and products of the disclosed methods can bind to an allosteric site that comprises portions of segments, amino acids, or sub-domains of the mAChR M₁ protein that potentiates interactions of the protein with other proteins, e.g. G-proteins.

Previous attempts to develop agonists that are highly selective for individual mAChR subtypes have failed because of the high conservation of the orthosteric ACh binding site. To circumvent problems associated with targeting the highly conserved orthosteric ACh binding site, it is believed that developing compounds that act at less highly conserved allosteric mAChR sites will afford highly selective activators/modulators.

In various further aspects, the compound activates mAChR M₁ response in mAChR M₁-transfected CHO-K1 cells with an EC₅₀ less than the EC₅₀ for one or more of mAChR M₂, mAChR M₃, mAChR M₄, or mAChR M₅ response in mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅-transfected CHO-K1 cells. That is, a disclosed compound can have selectivity for the mAChR M₁ receptor vis-à-vis one or more of the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors. For example, in one aspect, a disclosed compound can activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 20-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 100-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, or of >100-fold less than that of that for mAChR M₂. In a further aspect, a disclosed compound can activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 20-fold less than that for M₃, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 100-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, or of >100-fold less than that of that for mAChR M₃. In a further aspect, a disclosed compound can activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 20-fold less than that for M₄, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 100-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, or of >100-fold less than that of that for mAChR M₄. In a further aspect, a disclosed compound can activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 20-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 100-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, or of >100-fold less than that of that for mAChR M₅. In a further aspect, a disclosed compound can activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 10-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 20-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 30-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, MA or M₅ receptors, of about 50-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 100-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, or of >100-fold than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₁ or M₅ receptors. In various further aspects, the compound activates mAChR M₁ response in mAChR M₁-transfected CHO-K1 cells and is inactive for one or more of mAChR M₁, mAChR M₃, mAChR M₄, or mAChR M₅ response in mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅-transfected CHO-K1 cells.

In various further aspects, the compound activates mAChR M₁ response in M₁-transfected CHO-K1 cells with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM and exhibits a selectivity for the M₁ receptor vis-à-vis one or more of the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors. For example, in one aspect, the compound can have an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM, of less than about 5 μM, of less than about 2.5 μM, of less than about 1 μM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM; and the compound can also activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₁, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 20-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₂, or of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₂. In a further aspect, the compound can have an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM, of less than about 5 μM, of less than about 2.5 μM, of less than about 1 μM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM; and the compound can also activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 20-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₃, or of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₃. In a further aspect, the compound can have an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM, of less than about 5 μM, of less than about 2.5 μM, of less than about 1 μM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM; and the compound can also activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 20-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₄, or of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₄. In a further aspect, the compound can have an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM, of less than about 5 μM, of less than about 2.5 μM, of less than about 1 μM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM; and the compound can also activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 10-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 20-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, of about 30-fold less than that for mAChR M₅, or of about 50-fold less than that for mAChR M₅. In a further aspect, the compound can have an EC₅₀ of less than about 10 μM, of less than about 5 μM, of less than about 2.5 μM, of less than about 1 μM, of less than about 500 nM, of less than about 250 nM, of less than about 100 nM, or of less than about 50 nM; and the compound can also activate mAChR M₁ response with an EC₅₀ of about 5-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 10-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 20-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, of about 30-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors, or of about 50-fold less than that for the mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄ or M₅ receptors.

C. Methods of Making the Compounds

In one aspect, the invention relates to methods of making compounds useful as positive allosteric activators of the mAChR M₁ receptor, which can be useful in the treatment neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with muscarinic acetylcholine dysfunction and other diseases in which muscarinic acetylcholine receptors are involved. In one aspect, the invention relates to die disclosed synthetic manipulations. In a further aspect, the disclosed compounds comprise the products of the synthetic methods described herein.

In a further aspect, the disclosed compounds comprise a compound produced by a synthetic method described herein. In a still further aspect, the invention comprises a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of the product of the disclosed methods and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In a still further aspect, the invention comprises a method for manufacturing a medicament comprising combining at least one product of the disclosed methods with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.

The compounds of this invention can be prepared by employing reactions as shown in the disclosed schemes, in addition to other standard manipulations that are known in the literature, exemplified in the experimental sections or clear to one skilled in the art. For clarity, examples having a fewer substituent can be shown where multiple substituents are allowed under the definitions disclosed herein. Thus, the following examples are provided so that the invention might be more fully understood, are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limiting.

It is contemplated that each disclosed method can further comprise additional steps, manipulations, and/or components. It is also contemplated that any one or more step, manipulation, and/or component can be optionally omitted from the invention. It is understood that a disclosed method can be used to provide the disclosed compounds. It is also understood that the products of the disclosed methods can be employed in the disclosed compositions, kits, and uses.

1. Intermediate Route 1

In one aspect, amine intermediates of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 1.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 1B above. Thus, compounds of type 1.6 can be prepared by a coupling reaction of an appropriate aryl halide or aryl triflate, e.g., 1.4 as shown above. Such aryl halides and aryl triflates are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. The coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate coupling agent, e.g., a boronic acid or a boronic acid pinacol ester (1.5), in the presence of an appropriate palladium catalyst. Such boronic acid or a boronic acid pinacol esters are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. Such a palladium catalyzed coupling is commonly referred to as a “Suzuki coupling” and is well described in the literature (see Miyaura, N; Suzuki, A. Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-83 and J. Organomet. Chem. 1999, 576, 147-68). Examples of suitable Suzuki conditions include but are not limited to Pd(P(^(t)Bu)₃)₂, Cs₂CO₃, H₂O, THF, microwave, 150° C.; Pd(PPh₃)₄, K₂CO₃, dioxane, H₂O, microwave, 150° C.; and PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂, dioxane, Cs₂CO₃, H₂O, 120° C. It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that the biaryl intermediate may or may not contain functional groups that require temporary protecting groups for compatibility with this or further chemistry (see Greene, T. W. and Wuts, P. G. M. Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3^(rd) Ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1999).

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein X is Cl, Br, I, or OSO₂CF₃; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; and wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; in a palladium catalyzed coupling reaction with a second compound having the formula:

wherein each of R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C8 alkyl; or R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, are optionally covalently bonded and, together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached, comprise a 4- to 6-membered heterocycle; and wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino. C1-C3 dialkylamino; thereby forming an intermediate having a structure represented by a formula:

2. Intermediate Route 2

In one aspect, amine intermediates of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 1.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 211 above. Thus, compounds of type 2.5 can be prepared by a coupling reaction of an appropriate aryl halide or aryl triflate, e.g., 2.4 as shown above. Such aryl halides and aryl triflates are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. The coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate coupling agent, e.g., a boronic acid or a boronic acid pinacol ester (2.3), in the presence of an appropriate palladium catalyst. Such boronic acid or a boronic acid pinacol esters are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. Such a palladium catalyzed coupling is commonly referred to as a “Suzuki coupling” and is well described in the literature (see Miyaura, N; Suzuki, A. Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-83 and J. Organomet. Chem. 1999, 576, 147-68). Examples of suitable Suzuki conditions include but are not limited to Pd(P(^(t)Bu)₃)₂, Cs₂CO₃, H₂O, THF, microwave, 150° C.; Pd(PPh₃)₄, K₂CO₃, dioxane, H₂O, microwave, 150° C.; and PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂, dioxane, Cs₂CO₃, H₂O, 120° C. It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that the biaryl intermediate may or may not contain functional groups that require temporary protecting groups for compatibility with this or further chemistry (see Greene, T. W. and Wuts, P. G. M. Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3^(rd) Ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1999).

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C8 alkyl; or R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, are optionally covalently bonded and, together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached, comprise a 4- to 6-membered heterocycle; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; and wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; in a palladium catalyzed coupling reaction with a second compound having the formula: Ar²X, wherein X is Cl, Br, I, or OSO₂CF₃; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; thereby forming an intermediate having a structure represented by a formula:

3. Intermediate Route 3

In one aspect, amine intermediates of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 3.4, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 3B above. Thus, compounds of type 3.6 can be prepared by reaction of an aldehyde or ketone, e.g., 3.5 as shown above with hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3.2) in the presence of a suitable base, e.g., sodium acetate as shown above. Such aldehyde or ketone starting materials are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. Compounds of type 3.7 can be prepared by reduction of an appropriate oxime, e.g., 3.6 as shown above, with a reducing agent, e.g., zinc in acetic acid as shown above.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein R^(2a) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-Co cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with hydroxylamine hydrochloride; thereby forming an intermediate having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the oxime intermediate with a reducing agent, thereby forming an amine intermediate, having a structure represented by a formula:

4. Intermediate Route 4

In one aspect, heteroaryl chloride intermediates of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 4.4, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 4B above. Thus, compounds of type 4.7 can be prepared by reaction of a substituted pyridine, e.g., 4.5 as shown above, with a brominating reagent, e.g., N-bromosuccinimide (NBS) (4.6) as shown above, in the presence of a radical initiator, e.g., benzoyl peroxide as shown above. Such substituted pyridine starting materials are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. Compounds of type 4.9 can be prepared by reaction of an appropriate bromide intermediate, e.g., 4.7 as shown above, with an amine, e.g., 4.8 as shown above. Such amines are commercially available, prepared according to Intermediate Routes I-III, or readily prepared by one skilled in the art.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; with a brominating reagent in the presence of a radical initiator; thereby forming an intermediate having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the bromide intermediate with a second compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; and wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF_, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

5. Intermediate Route 5

In one aspect, aminopyridine intermediates of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in genetic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 5.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 5B above. Thus, compounds of type 5.5 can be prepared by a palladium catalyzed coupling reaction of a heteroaryl chloride intermediate, e.g., 5.4 as shown above, with tert-butyl carbamate 5.1, as shown above. Such heteroaryl chloride intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route IV above. It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that a variety of palladium catalysts, phosphine ligands, and bases may be suitable for this coupling reaction (see J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2007, 129, 13001 and references therein). Examples of potentially useful palladium catalysts for this coupling include but are not limited to his(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(O), palladium acetate, and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)-palladium. Examples of potentially useful phosphine ligands for this coupling include but are not limited to tert-butyl XPhos, XPhos, XANTPHOS, and BINAP. Examples of potentially useful bases for this coupling include but are not limited to sodium tert-butoxide, cesium carbonate, and tripotassium phosphate. Such a palladium catalyzed coupling reactions is commonly referred to as a “Buchwald-Hartwig coupling” and is well described in the literature (see J. Org. Chem. 2009, 74, 4635; J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2007, 129, 13001; Org. Lett. 2000, 2, 1101; and references therein). Compounds of type 5.6 can be prepared by treatment of the tert-butyl carbonate intermediate, e.g., 5.5 as shown above, with acid. Examples of suitable acids include but are not limited to hydrochloric acid and trifluoroacetic acid.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino. C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl. Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula:

in a palladium catalyzed coupling reaction; thereby forming an intermediate having the formula:

Alternatively, intermediate 5.2 can be prepared by the synthetic scheme shown in Scheme 5c below.

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the tert-butyl carbamate intermediate with acid; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

6. Synthesis Route

In one aspect, substituted triazolopyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 6.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 6B above. Thus, compounds of type 6.4 can be prepared by treatment of a heteroaryl chloride intermediate, e.g., 4.9 as shown above, with hydrazine. Such heteroaryl chloride intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route IV above. Compounds of type 6.6 can be formed by reaction of a hydrazinyl intermediate, e.g., 5.4 as shown above, with a suitable orthoester or orthoester equivalent, e.g., triethylorthoformate 6.5 as shown above. It will be appreciated by one skilled in the art that these two steps may or may not be carried out sequentially in one pot.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen. —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 allyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein AR² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with hydrazine; thereby forming an intermediate having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the hydrazinyl intermediate with a second compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein R^(3b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH_(t)F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

7. Synthesis Route 2

In one aspect, substituted triazolopyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 6.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 7B above. Thus, compounds of type 7.4 can be prepared by treatment of a heteroaryl chloride intermediate, e.g., 72 as shown above, with an acyl hydrazide, e.g., formohydrazide 7.3 as shown above. Such heteroaryl chloride intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route IV above.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₁F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino; C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula:

wherein R^(3b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

8. Synthesis Route 3

In one aspect, substituted imidazopyridine and triazolopyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 8.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 8B above. Thus, compounds of type &6 can be prepared by a coupling reaction of an appropriate aryl halide or aryl triflate, e.g., 8.4 as shown above. Such aryl halides and aryl triflates may be prepared by one skilled in the art according to the methods outlined herein. The coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate coupling agent, e.g., a boronic acid or a boronic acid pinacol ester (e.g., 8.5 as shown above), in the presence of an appropriate palladium catalyst. Such boronic acid or a boronic acid pinacol esters are commercially available or readily prepared by one skilled in the art. Such a palladium catalyzed coupling is commonly referred to as a “Suzuki coupling” and is well described in the literature (see Miyaura, N; Suzuki, A. Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-83 and J. Organomet. Chem. 1999, 576, 147-68). Examples of suitable Suzuki conditions include but are not limited to Pd(P(^(t)Bu)₃)₂, Cs₂CO₃, H₂O, THF, microwave, 150° C.; Pd(PPh₃)₄, K₂CO₃, dioxane, H₂O, microwave, 150° C.; and PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂, dioxane, Cs₂CO₃, H₂O, 120° C.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein X is Cl, Br, I, or OSO₂CF₃; wherein Q is N or CR^(3a); wherein Z is N or CR^(3b), provided that Q and Z are not simultaneously N; wherein V is N or CR^(3c), provided that when V is CR^(3c), then Q and Z are, respectively, CR^(3a) and CR^(3b); wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(3a), CR^(3b), and R^(3c), when present, is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ail is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected front C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; in a palladium catalyzed coupling reaction with a second compound having the formula:

wherein each of R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C8 alkyl; or R^(50a) and R^(50b), when present, are optionally covalently bonded and, together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached, comprise a 4- to 6-membered heterocycle; Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

9. Synthesis Route 4

In one aspect, substituted imidazopyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type, 9.2, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 9A above. Thus, compounds of type 9.4 can be prepared by treatment of an aminopyridine intermediate, e.g., 5.4 as shown above, with an α-haloketone, α-haloaldehyde, or equivalent, e.g., 9.3 as shown above, in a cyclization reaction. Such aminopyridine intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route V above.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising, the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula:

wherein X is Cl, Br, or I; and wherein each of R^(3a) and R^(3b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

10. Synthesis Route 5

In one aspect, substituted triazolopyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 10.3, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 10A above. Thus, compounds of type 10.5 can be prepared by treatment of an aminopyridine intermediate, e.g., 5.4 as shown above, with the dimethylacetal of an N,N-dimethylalkylamide, e.g., 10.4 as shown above, followed by treatment with hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3.2). Such aminopyridine intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route V above. Compounds of type 10.6 can be formed by reaction of an amideoxime intermediate, e.g., 10.5 as shown above, with a dehydrating reagent, e.g., trifluoroacetic anhydride.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COW, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula:

wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; followed by reaction with hydroxylamine hydrochloride; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the amideoxime intermediate with a dehydrating reagent; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

11. SYNTHESIS ROUTE 6

In one aspect, substituted pyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 11.4, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 11A above. Thus, compounds of type 11.7 can be prepared by reaction of a heteroaryl halide (or heteroaryl triflate) intermediate, e.g., 11.5 as shown above, with a suitable alkyne, e.g., 11.6 as shown above, in a palladium catalyzed coupling. Such heteroaryl halide (or heteroaryl triflate) intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route IV above. Such a palladium catalyzed coupling is commonly referred to as a “Sonogashira coupling” and is well described in the literature (see Adv. Synth. Cat. 2011, 353, 3090; J. Org. Chem. 2008, 73, 6037; and references therein). Compounds of type 11.8 can be formed by reaction of an alkyne intermediate, e.g., 11.7 as shown above, in a copper assisted cycloisomerization. Such transformations are described in the literature (see J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2001, 123, 3761 for an example).

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein X is Cl, Br, I, or OSO₂CF₃; wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CHEF, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl. C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 allyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula:

wherein R^(3b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₁F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the alkyne intermediate in a copper assisted cycloisomerization; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

12. SYNTHESIS ROUTE 7

In one aspect, substituted pyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 12.5, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 12A above. Thus, compounds of type 12.7 can be prepared by reaction of a heteroaryl halide (or heteroaryl triflate) intermediate, e.g., 11.5 as shown above, with a suitable alkyne, e.g., 12.6 as shown above, in a palladium catalyzed coupling. Such heteroaryl halide (or heteroaryl triflate) intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route IV above. Such a palladium catalyzed coupling is commonly referred to as a “Sonogashira coupling” and is well described in the literature (see Adv. Synth. Cat. 2011, 353, 3090; J. Org. Chem. 2008, 73, 6037; and references therein). Compounds of type 12.8 can be formed by reaction of a propargylic alcohol intermediate, e.g., 12.7 as shown above, with methanesulfonyl chloride or methanesulfonic anhydride. Compounds of type 12.10 can be formed by treatment of an appropriate mesylate intermediate, e.g., 12.8 as shown above, with a higher order cuprate, e.g., 12.9 as shown above. Such transformations are described in the literature (see Org. Lett. 2008, 10, 2307 for an example).

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein X is Cl, Br, I, or OSO₂CF₃; wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃. —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl. C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula:

wherein R^(3b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₁F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the propargylic alcohol intermediate with methanesulfonyl chloride or methanesulfonic anhydride; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the mesylate intermediate with a second compound having the formula: R^(3c)Cu(CN)Li, wherein R^(3c) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

13. SYNTHESIS ROUTE

In one aspect, substituted pyridine analogs of the present invention can be prepared generically by the synthesis scheme as shown below.

Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.

In one aspect, compounds of type 13.5, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 13A above. Thus, compounds of type 13.7 can be prepared by reaction of a heteroaryl halide (or heteroaryl triflate) intermediate, e.g., 11.5 as shown above, with a suitable organometallic reagent, e.g., 13.6 as shown above, in a palladium catalyzed coupling. Such heteroaryl halide (or heteroaryl triflate) intermediates are prepared according to Intermediate Route IV above. Such palladium catalyzed couplings are well known to one skilled in the art and include but are not limited to organoboron reagents, organotin reagents, organocuprate reagents, and organozinc reagents (see the review article Int. J. Pharm. Chem. Sci. 2013, 2, 1159 and references therein). Compounds of type 13.9 can be formed by reaction of a suitable intermediate, e.g., 13.7 as shown above, with an α-haloketone, α-haloaldehyde, or equivalent, e.g., 13.8 as shown above, in an alkylation reaction. Compounds of type 13.10 can be formed by treatment of an appropriate quaternary salt intermediate, e.g., 13.9 as shown above, with a suitable base. Such transformations are described in the literature (see J. Med. Chem. 2011, 54, 3076 and Synlett 2003, 2086 for examples).

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method of making a compound comprising the step of reacting a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

wherein X is Cl, Br, I, or OSO₂CF₃; wherein each of R^(1a) and R^(1b) is independently hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; wherein each of R^(2a) and R^(2b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently hydrogen, fluorine, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; wherein Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; and wherein Ar¹ is substituted with 0 or 1 group independently selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —COR⁶, or SO₂R⁷; wherein R⁶, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino; wherein R⁷, when present, is selected from C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; wherein AP is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure; and wherein Ar² is substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, cyclopropyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino; with a second compound having the formula: M-CH₂R^(3c), wherein M is any metal and its associated functional groups that render the reagent suitable for participation in a palladium catalyzed coupling reaction; wherein R^(3c) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the intermediate with with a second compound having the formula:

wherein Y is chloro, bromo, or iodo; wherein each of R^(3a) and R^(3b) is independently hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

In a further aspect, the method comprises the step of reacting the quaternary salt intermediate with a suitable base; thereby forming a compound having a structure represented by a formula:

D. Pharmaceutical Compositions

In one aspect, the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising the disclosed compounds. That is, a pharmaceutical composition can be provided comprising an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or at least one product of a disclosed method, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound of the pharmaceutical composition is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In a further aspect, the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition is a therapeutically effective amount. In a still further aspect, the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition is a prophylactically effective amount.

In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a disclosed compound. In a yet further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a product of a disclosed method of making.

In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM. In a still further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 5,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 2,500 nM. In an even further aspect the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 1,000 nM. In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR with an EC₅₀ of less than about 500 nM. In a still further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 250 nM. In a yet further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of less than about 100 nM. In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10,000 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 5,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 2,500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₃₀ of between from about 1,000 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 250 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 100 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition exhibits positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10 nM to about 1 nM.

In one aspect, the pharmaceutical composition is used to treat a mammal. In a yet further aspect, the mammal is a human. In a further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step. In a further aspect, the mammal has been identified to be in need of treatment of the disorder. In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition is used to treat a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder. In a yet further aspect, the disorder is associated with mAChR M₁ dysfunction.

In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition is used to treat a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder. In a still further aspect, the disorder is Alzheimer's disease. In a yet further aspect, disorder is selected from psychosis, schizophrenia, conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, bipolar disorder, psychotic episodes of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, psychotic mood disorders such as severe major depressive disorder; mood disorders associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, mood disorders associated with schizophrenia, behavioral manifestations of mental retardation, conduct disorder, autistic disorder, movement disorders, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, movement disorders associated with Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia, drug induced and neurodegeneration based dyskinesias, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, cognitive disorders, dementias, and memory disorders. In an even further aspect, the disorder is a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with M₁ receptor activity.

In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition is used to treat a disorder selected from conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, psychotic episodes of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, psychotic mood disorders such as severe major depressive disorder; mood disorders associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, mood disorders associated with schizophrenia, behavioral manifestations of mental retardation, conduct disorder, autistic disorder, movement disorders, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, movement disorders associated with Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia, drug induced and neurodegeneration based dyskinesias, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, cognitive disorders, dementias, and memory disorders.

In certain aspects, the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions comprise the disclosed compounds (including pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and, optionally, other therapeutic ingredients or adjuvants. The instant compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous) administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the particular host, and nature and severity of the conditions for which the active ingredient is being administered. The pharmaceutical compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids. When the compound of the present invention is acidic, its corresponding salt can be conveniently prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases, including inorganic bases and organic bases. Salts derived from such inorganic bases include aluminum, ammonium, calcium, copper (-ic and -ous), ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganese (-ic and -ous), potassium, sodium, zinc and the like salts. Particularly preferred are the ammonium, calcium, magnesium, potassium and sodium salts. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable organic non-toxic bases include salts of primacy, secondary, and tertiary amines, as well as cyclic amines and substituted amines such as naturally occurring and synthesized substituted amines. Other pharmaceutically acceptable organic non-toxic bases from which salts can be formed include ion exchange resins such as, for example, arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine and the like.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic acids”, includes inorganic acids, organic acids, and salts prepared therefrom, for example, acetic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glutamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, succinic, sulfuric, tartaric, p-toluenesulfonic acid and the like. Preferred are citric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, maleic, phosphoric, sulfuric, and tartaric acids.

In practice, the compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, of this invention can be combined as the active ingredient in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. The carrier can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration, e.g., oral or parenteral (including intravenous). Thus, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be presented as discrete units suitable for oral administration such as capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient. Further, the compositions can be presented as a powder, as granules, as a solution, as a suspension in an aqueous liquid, as a non-aqueous liquid, as an oil-in-water emulsion or as a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. In addition to the common dosage forms set out above, the compounds of the invention, and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) thereof, can also be administered by controlled release means and/or delivery devices. The compositions can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, such methods include a step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier that constitutes one or more necessary ingredients. In general, the compositions are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both. The product can then be conveniently shaped into the desired presentation.

Thus, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compounds of the invention. The compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, can also be included in pharmaceutical compositions in combination with one or more other therapeutically active compounds.

The pharmaceutical carrier employed can be, for example, a solid, liquid, or gas. Examples of solid carriers include lactose, terra alba, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, and stearic acid. Examples of liquid carriers are sugar syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, and water. Examples of gaseous carriers include carbon dioxide and nitrogen.

In preparing the compositions for oral dosage form, any convenient pharmaceutical media can be employed. For example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like can be used to form oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, elixirs and solutions; while carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents, and the like can be used to form oral solid preparations such as powders, capsules and tablets. Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules are the preferred oral dosage units whereby solid pharmaceutical carriers are employed. Optionally, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques

A tablet containing the composition of this invention can be prepared by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients or adjuvants. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing, in a suitable machine, the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine, a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.

The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a compound of the invention (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and optionally one or more additional therapeutic agents or adjuvants. The instant compositions include compositions suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous) administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the particular host, and nature and severity of the conditions for which the active ingredient is being administered. The pharmaceutical compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.

Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention suitable for parenteral administration can be prepared as solutions or suspensions of the active compounds in water. A suitable surfactant can be included such as, for example, hydroxypropylcellulose. Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof in oils. Further, a preservative can be included to prevent the detrimental growth of microorganisms.

Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions. Furthermore, the compositions can be in the form of sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of such sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. In all cases, the final injectable form must be sterile and must be effectively fluid for easy syringability. The pharmaceutical compositions must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage; thus, preferably should be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), vegetable oils, and suitable mixtures thereof.

Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be in a form suitable for topical use such as, for example, an aerosol, cream, ointment, lotion, dusting powder, mouth washes, gargles, and the like. Further, the compositions can be in a form suitable for use in transdermal devices. These formulations can be prepared, utilizing a compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, via conventional processing methods. As an example, a cream or ointment is prepared by mixing hydrophilic material and water, together with about 5 wt % to about 10 wt % of the compound, to produce a cream or ointment having a desired consistency.

Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be in a form suitable for rectal administration wherein the carrier is a solid. It is preferable that the mixture forms unit dose suppositories. Suitable carriers include cocoa butter and other materials commonly used in the art. The suppositories can be conveniently formed by first admixing the composition with the softened or melted carrier(s) followed by chilling and shaping in molds.

In addition to the aforementioned carrier ingredients, the pharmaceutical formulations described above can include, as appropriate, one or more additional carrier ingredients such as diluents, buffets, flavoring agents, binders, surface-active agents, thickeners, lubricants, preservatives (including anti-oxidants) and the like. Furthermore, other adjuvants can be included to render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient. Compositions containing a compound of the invention, and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, can also be prepared in powder or liquid concentrate form.

In the treatment conditions which require positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ receptor activity an appropriate dosage level will generally be about 0.01 to 500 mg per kg patient body weight per day and can be administered in single or multiple doses. Preferably, the dosage level will be about 0.1 to about 250 mg/kg per day; more preferably 0.5 to 100 mg/kg per day. A suitable dosage level can be about 0.01 to 250 mg/kg per day, about 0.05 to 100 mg/kg per day, or about 0.1 to 50 mg/kg per day. Within this range the dosage can be 0.05 to 0.5, 0.5 to 5.0 or 5.0 to 50 mg/kg per day. For oral administration, the compositions are preferably provided in the form of tablets containing 1.0 to 1000 milligrams of the active ingredient, particularly 1.0, 5.0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 900 and 1000 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage of the patient to be treated. The compound can be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day. This dosing regimen can be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response.

It is understood, however, that the specific dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors. Such factors include the age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet of the patient. Other factors include the time and route of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, and the type and severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy.

The present invention is further directed to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for modulating mAChR M₁ receptor activity (e.g., treatment of one or more neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with mAChR M₁ receptor dysfunction) in mammals (e.g., humans) comprising combining one or more disclosed compounds, products, or compositions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method for manufacturing a medicament comprising combining at least one disclosed compound or at least one disclosed product with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.

The disclosed pharmaceutical compositions can further comprise other therapeutically active compounds, which are usually applied in the treatment of the above mentioned pathological conditions.

It is understood that the disclosed compositions can be prepared from the disclosed compounds. It is also understood that the disclosed compositions can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.

E. Methods of Using the Compounds and Compositions

Also provided is a method of use of a disclosed compound, composition, or medicament. In one aspect, the method of use is directed to the treatment of a disorder. In a further aspect, the disclosed compounds can be used as single agents or in combination with one or more other drugs in the treatment, prevention, control, amelioration or reduction of risk of the aforementioned diseases, disorders and conditions for which the compound or the other drugs have utility, where the combination of drugs together are safer or more effective than either drug alone. The other drugs) can be administered by a route and in an amount commonly used therefore, contemporaneously or sequentially with a disclosed compound. When a disclosed compound is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such drugs and the disclosed compound is preferred. However, the combination therapy can also be administered on overlapping schedules. It is also envisioned that the combination of one or more active ingredients and a disclosed compound can be more efficacious than either as a single agent.

In one aspect, the compounds can be coadministered with anti-Alzheimer's agents, beta-secretase inhibitors, gamma-secretase inhibitors, orthosteric muscarinic agonists, muscarinic potentiators, cholinesterase inhibitors, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors, NSAIDs and anti-amyloid antibodies. In a further aspect, the compounds can be administered in combination with sedatives, hypnotics, anxiolytics, antipsychotics (typical and atypical), selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs), 5-HT2 antagonists, GlyT1 inhibitors and the like such as, but not limited to: risperidone, clozapine, haloperidol, fluoxetine, prazepam, xanomeline, lithium, phenobarbitol, and salts thereof and combinations thereof.

The pharmaceutical compositions and methods of the present invention can further comprise other therapeutically active compounds as noted herein which are usually applied in the treatment of the above mentioned pathological conditions.

1. Treatment Methods

The compounds disclosed herein are useful for treating, preventing, ameliorating, controlling or reducing the risk of a variety of disorders wherein the patient or subject would benefit from selective positive allosteric modulation of the M₁ receptor. In one aspect, a treatment can include selective M₁ receptor modulation to an extent effective to affect cholinergic activity. Thus, a disorder can be associated with cholinergic activity, for example cholinergic hypofunction. In one aspect, provided is a method of treating or preventing a disorder in a subject comprising the step of administering to the subject at least one disclosed compound; at least one disclosed pharmaceutical composition; and/or at least one disclosed product in a dosage and amount effective to treat the disorder in the subject.

Also provided is a method for the treatment of one or more disorders, for which muscarinic receptor activation is predicted to be beneficial, in a subject comprising the step of administering to the subject at least one disclosed compound; at least one disclosed pharmaceutical composition; and/or at least one disclosed product in a dosage and amount effective to treat the disorder in the subject.

The invention is directed at the use of described chemical compositions to treat diseases or disorders in patients (preferably human) wherein muscarinic receptor activation would be predicted to have a therapeutic effect, such as Alzheimer's disease (both palliative cognitive and disease-modifying), cognitive impairment, schizophrenia, pain disorders (including acute pain, neuropathic pain and inflammatory pain), and sleep disorders, by administering one or more disclosed compounds or products.

In one aspect, provided is a method for treating or preventing anxiety, comprising: administering to a subject at least one disclosed compound; at least one disclosed pharmaceutical composition; and/or at least one disclosed product in a dosage and amount effective to treat the disorder in the subject. At present, the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV) (1994, American Psychiatric Association, Washington, D.C.), provides a diagnostic tool for disorders including anxiety and related disorders. These include: panic disorder with or without agoraphobia, agoraphobia without history of panic disorder, specific phobia, social phobia, obsessive-compulsive disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder, acute stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, anxiety disorder due to a general medical condition, substance-induced anxiety disorder and anxiety disorder not otherwise specified.

Also provided is a method for the treatment of a disorder in a mammal comprising the step of administering to the mammal at least one disclosed compound, composition, or medicament.

In one aspect, the NMDA receptor is central to a wide range of CNS processes, and plays a role in a variety of disease states in humans or other species. The action of the M₁ receptor potentiates NMDA receptor function, which increases activation of the NMDA receptor following glutamate release from the presynaptic terminal. Changes in NMDA-mediated neurotransmission have been implicated in certain neuropsychiatric disorders such as dementia, depression and psychoses, for example schizophrenia, and learning and memory disorders, for example attention deficit disorders and autism.

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds have utility in treating a variety of neurological and psychiatric disorders, including one or more of the following conditions or diseases: schizophrenia or psychosis including schizophrenia (paranoid, disorganized, catatonic or undifferentiated), schizophreniform disorder, schizoaffective disorder, delusional disorder, brief psychotic disorder, shared psychotic disorder, psychotic disorder due to a general medical condition and substance-induced or drug-induced (phencyclidine, ketamine and other dissociative anesthetics, amphetamine and other psychostimulants and cocaine) psychosis psychotic disorder, psychosis associated with affective disorders, brief reactive psychosis, schizoaffective psychosis, “schizophrenia-spectrum” disorders such as schizoid or schizotypal personality disorders, or illness associated with psychosis (such as major depression, manic depressive (bipolar) disorder, Alzheimer's disease and post-traumatic stress syndrome), including both the positive and the negative symptoms of schizophrenia and other psychoses; cognitive disorders including dementia (associated with Alzheimer's disease, ischemia, multi-infarct dementia, trauma, vascular problems or stroke, HIV disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, Pick's disease, Creutzfeldt-Jacob disease, perinatal hypoxia, other general medical conditions or substance abuse); delirium, amnestic disorders or age-related cognitive decline; anxiety disorders including acute stress disorder, agoraphobia, generalized anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, panic attack, panic disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder, separation anxiety disorder, social phobia, specific phobia, substance-induced anxiety disorder and anxiety due to a general medical condition; substance-related disorders and addictive behaviors (including substance-induced delirium, persisting dementia, persisting amnestic disorder, psychotic disorder or anxiety disorder; tolerance, dependence or withdrawal from substances including alcohol, amphetamines, cannabis, cocaine, hallucinogens, inhalants, nicotine, opioids, phencyclidine, sedatives, hypnotics or anxiolytics); obesity, bulimia nervosa and compulsive eating disorders; bipolar disorders, mood disorders including depressive disorders; depression including unipolar depression, seasonal depression and post-partum depression, premenstrual syndrome (PMS) and premenstrual dysphoric disorder (PDD), mood disorders due to a general medical condition, and substance-induced mood disorders; learning disorders, pervasive developmental disorder including autistic disorder, attention disorders including attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and conduct disorder; NMDA receptor-related disorders such as autism, depression, benign forgetfulness, childhood learning disorders and closed head injury; movement disorders, including akinesias and akinetic-rigid syndromes (including Parkinson's disease, drug-induced parkinsonism, post-encephalitic parkinsonism, progressive supranuclear palsy, multiple system atrophy, corticobasal degeneration, parkinsonism-ALS dementia complex and basal ganglia calcification), medication-induced parkinsonism (such as neuroleptic-induced parkinsonism, neuroleptic malignant syndrome, neuroleptic-induced acute dystonia, neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia, neuroleptic-induced tardive dyskinesia and medication-induced postural tremor), Gilles de La Tourette's syndrome, epilepsy, muscular spasms and disorders associated with muscular spasticity or weakness including tremors; dyskinesias including tremor (such as rest tremor, postural tremor and intention tremor), chorea (such as Sydenham's chorea, Huntington's disease, benign hereditary chorea, neuroacanthocytosis, symptomatic chorea, drug-induced chorea and hemiballism), myoclonus (including generalized myoclonus and focal myoclonus), tics (including simple tics, complex tics and symptomatic tics), and dystonia (including generalized dystonia such as idiopathic dystonia, drug-induced dystonia, symptomatic dystonia and paroxysmal dystonia, and focal dystonia such as blepharospasm, oromandibular dystonia, spasmodic dysphonia, spasmodic torticollis, axial dystonia, dystonic writer's cramp and hemiplegic dystonia)]; urinary incontinence; neuronal damage including ocular damage, retinopathy or macular degeneration of the eye, tinnitus, hearing impairment and loss, and brain edema; emesis; and sleep disorders including insomnia and narcolepsy.

In a specific aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating cognitive disorders, comprising: administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. Particular cognitive disorders are dementia, delirium, amnestic disorders and age-related cognitive decline. At present, the text revision of the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV-TR) (2000, American Psychiatric Association, Washington D.C.) provides a diagnostic tool that includes cognitive disorders including dementia, delirium, amnestic disorders and age-related cognitive decline. As used herein, the term “cognitive disorders” includes treatment of those mental disorders as described in DSM-IV-TR. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies and classification systems for mental disorders, and that these systems evolve with medical and scientific progress. Thus the term “cognitive disorders” is intended to include like disorders that are described in other diagnostic sources. In another specific embodiment, the present invention provides a method for treating anxiety disorders, comprising: administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. Particular anxiety disorders are generalized anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder and panic attack. At present, the text revision of the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV-TR) (2000, American Psychiatric Association, Washington D.C.) provides a diagnostic tool that includes anxiety disorders are generalized anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder and panic attack. As used herein, the term “anxiety disorders” includes treatment of those mental disorders as described in DSM-IV-TR. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies and classification systems for mental disorders, and that these systems evolve with medical and scientific progress. Thus the term “anxiety disorders” is intended to include like disorders that are described in other diagnostic sources.

In a further specific aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating schizophrenia or psychosis comprising: administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. Particular schizophrenia or psychosis pathologies are paranoid, disorganized, catatonic or undifferentiated schizophrenia and substance-induced psychotic disorder. At present, the text revision of the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV-TR) (2000, American Psychiatric Association, Washington D.C.) provides a diagnostic tool that includes paranoid, disorganized, catatonic or undifferentiated schizophrenia and substance-induced psychotic disorder. As used herein, the term “schizophrenia or psychosis” includes treatment of those mental disorders as described in DSM-W-TR. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies and classification systems for mental disorders, and that these systems evolve with medical and scientific progress. Thus the term “schizophrenia or psychosis” is intended to include like disorders that are described in other diagnostic sources.

In a further specific aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating substance-related disorders and addictive behaviors, comprising: administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. Particular substance-related disorders and addictive behaviors are persisting dementia, persisting amnestic disorder, psychotic disorder or anxiety disorder induced by substance abuse; and tolerance of, dependence on or withdrawal from substances of abuse. At present, the text revision of the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV-TR) (2000, American Psychiatric Association, Washington D.C.) provides a diagnostic tool that includes persisting dementia, persisting amnestic disorder, psychotic disorder or anxiety disorder induced by substance abuse; and tolerance of, dependence on or withdrawal from substances of abuse. As used herein, the term “substance-related disorders and addictive behaviors” includes treatment of those mental disorders as described in DSM-IV-TR. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies and classification systems for mental disorders, and that these systems evolve with medical and scientific progress. Thus the term “substance-related disorders and addictive behaviors” is intended to include like disorders that are described in other diagnostic sources.

In a still further aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating pain, comprising: administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. Particular pain embodiments are bone and joint pain (osteoarthritis), repetitive motion pain, dental pain, cancer pain, myofascial pain (muscular injury, fibromyalgia), perioperative pain (general surgery, gynecological), chronic pain and neuropathic pain.

In a further aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating obesity or eating disorders associated with excessive food intake and complications associated therewith, comprising: administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. At present, obesity is included in the tenth edition of the International Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems (ICD-10) (1992 World Health Organization) as a general medical condition. The text revision of the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV-TR) (2000, American Psychiatric Association, Washington D.C.) provides a diagnostic tool that includes obesity in the presence of psychological factors affecting medical condition. As used herein, the term “obesity or eating disorders associated with excessive food intake” includes treatment of those medical conditions and disorders described in ICD-10 and DSM-W-TR. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies and classification systems for general medical conditions, and that these systems evolve with medical and scientific progress. Thus, the term “obesity or eating disorders associated with excessive food intake” is intended to include like conditions and disorders that are described in other diagnostic sources.

The compounds are further useful in a method for the prevention, treatment, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of the diseases, disorders and conditions noted herein. The compounds are further useful in a method for the prevention, treatment, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of the aforementioned diseases, disorders and conditions in combination with other agents.

The present invention is further directed to administration of a selective M₁ receptor modulator for improving treatment outcomes in the context of cognitive or behavioral therapy. That is, in one aspect, the invention relates to a cotherapeutic method comprising the step of administering to a mammal an effective amount and dosage of at least one compound of the invention in connection with cognitive or behavioral therapy.

In a further aspect, administration improves treatment outcomes in the context of cognitive or behavioral therapy. Administration in connection with cognitive or behavioral therapy can be continuous or intermittent. Administration need not be simultaneous with therapy and can be before, during, and/or after therapy. For example, cognitive or behavioral therapy can be provided within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days before or after administration of the compound. As a further example, cognitive or behavioral therapy can be provided within 1, 2, 3, or 4 weeks before or after administration of the compound. As a still further example, cognitive or behavioral therapy can be provided before or after administration within a period of time of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 half-lives of the administered compound.

In one aspect, the disclosed compounds can be used in combination with one or more other drugs in the treatment, prevention, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of diseases or conditions for which disclosed compounds or the other drugs can have utility, where the combination of the drugs together are safer or more effective than either drug alone. Such other drug(s) can be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of the present invention. When a compound of the present invention is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such other drugs and a disclosed compound is preferred. However, the combination therapy can also include therapies in which a disclosed compound and one or more other drugs are administered on different overlapping schedules. It is also contemplated that when used in combination with one or more other active ingredients, the disclosed compounds and the other active ingredients can be used in lower doses than when each is used singly.

Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions include those that contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of the present invention.

The above combinations include combinations of a disclosed compound not only with one other active compound, but also with two or more other active compounds. Likewise, disclosed compounds can be used in combination with other drugs that are used in the prevention, treatment, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of the diseases or conditions for which disclosed compounds are useful. Such other drugs can be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of the present invention. When a compound of the present invention is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition containing such other drugs in addition to a disclosed compound is preferred. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions include those that also contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of the present invention.

The weight ratio of a disclosed compound to the second active ingredient can be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when a compound of the present invention is combined with another agent, the weight ratio of a disclosed compound to the other agent will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200. Combinations of a compound of the present invention and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used.

In such combinations a disclosed compound and other active agents can be administered separately or in conjunction. In addition, the administration of one element can be prior to, concurrent to, or subsequent to the administration of other agent(s).

Accordingly, the subject compounds can be used alone or in combination with other agents which are known to be beneficial in the subject indications or other drugs that affect receptors or enzymes that either increase the efficacy, safety, convenience, or reduce unwanted side effects or toxicity of the disclosed compounds. The subject compound and the other agent can be coadministered, either in concomitant therapy or in a fixed combination.

In one aspect, the compound can be employed in combination with anti-Alzheimer's agents, beta-secretase inhibitors, gamma-secretase inhibitors, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors, NSAID's including ibuprofen, vitamin E, and anti-amyloid antibodies. In another embodiment, the subject compound can be employed in combination with sedatives, hypnotics, anxiolytics, antipsychotics, antianxiety agents, cyclopyrrolones, imidazopyridines, pyrazolopyrimidines, minor tranquilizers, melatonin agonists and antagonists, melatonergic agents, benzodiazepines, barbiturates, 5HT-2 antagonists, and the like, such as: adinazolam, allobarbital, alonimid, alprazolam, amisulpride, amitriptyline, amobarbital, amoxapine, aripiprazole, bentazepam, benzoctamine, brotizolam, bupropion, busprione, butabarbital, butalbital, capuride, carbocloral, chloral betaine, chloral hydrate, clomipramine, clonazepam, cloperidone, clorazepate, chlordiazepoxide, clorethate, chlorpromazine, clozapine, cyprazepam, desipramine, dexclamol, diazepam, dichloralphenazone, divalproex, diphenhydramine, doxepin, estazolam, ethchlorvynol, etomidate, fenobam, flunitrazepam, flupentixol, fluplienazine, flurazepam, fluvoxamine, fluoxetine, fosazepam, glutethimide, halazepam, haloperidol, hydroxyzine, imipramine, lithium, lorazepam, lormetazepam, maprotiline, mecloqualone, melatonin, mephobarbital, meprobamate, methaqualone, midaflur, midazolam, nefazodone, nisobamate, nitrazepam, nortriptyline, olanzapine, oxazepam, paraldehyde, paroxetine, pentobarbital, perlapine, perphenazine, phenelzine, phenobarbital, prazepam, promethazine, propofol, protriptyline, quazepam, quetiapine, reclazepam, risperidone, roletamide, secobarbital, sertraline, suproclone, temazepam, thioridazine, thiothixene, tracazolate, tranylcypromaine, trazodone, triazolam, trepipam, tricetamide, triclofos, trifluoperazine, trimetozine, trimipramine, uldazepam, venlafaxine, zaleplon, ziprasidone, zolazepam, Zolpidem, and salts thereof, and combinations thereof, and the like, or the subject compound can be administered in conjunction with the use of physical methods such as with light therapy or electrical stimulation.

In a further aspect, the compound can be employed in combination with levodopa (with or without a selective extracerebral decarboxylase inhibitor such as carbidopa or benserazide), anticholinergics such as biperiden (optionally as its hydrochloride or lactate salt) and trihexyphenidyl (benzhexol) hydrochloride, COMT inhibitors such as entacapone, MOA-B inhibitors, antioxidants, A2a adenosine receptor antagonists, cholinergic agonists, NMDA receptor antagonists, serotonin receptor antagonists and dopamine receptor agonists such as alentemol, bromocriptine, fenoldopam, lisuride, naxagolide, pergolide and pramipexole. It will be appreciated that the dopamine agonist can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, for example, alentemol hydrobromide, bromocriptine mesylate, fenoldopam mesylate, naxagolide hydrochloride and pergolide mesylate. Lisuride and pramipexol are commonly used in a non-salt form.

In a further aspect, the compound can be employed in combination with a compound from the phenothiazine, thioxanthene, heterocyclic dibenzazepine, butyrophenone, diphenylbutylpiperidine and indolone classes of neuroleptic agent. Suitable examples of phenothiazines include chlorpromazine, mesoridazine, thioridazine, acetophenazine, fluphenazine, perphenazine and trifluoperazine. Suitable examples of thioxanthenes include chlorprothixene and thiothixene. An example of a dibenzazepine is clozapine. An example of a butyrophenone is haloperidol. An example of a diphenylbutylpiperidine is pimozide. An example of an indolone is molindolone. Other neuroleptic agents include loxapine, sulpiride and risperidone. It will be appreciated that the neuroleptic agents when used in combination with the subject compound can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, for example, chlorpromazine hydrochloride, mesoridazine besylate, thioridazine hydrochloride, acetophenazine maleate, fluphenazine hydrochloride, flurphenazine enathate, fluphenazine decanoate, trifluoperazine hydrochloride, thiothixene hydrochloride, haloperidol decanoate, loxapine succinate and molindone hydrochloride. Perphenazine, chlorprothixene, clozapine, haloperidol, pimozide and risperidone are commonly used in a non-salt form. Thus, the subject compound can be employed in combination with acetophenazine, alentemol, aripiprazole, amisulpride, benzhexol, bromocriptine, biperiden, chlorpromazine, chlorprothixene, clozapine, diazepam, fenoldopam, fluphenazine, haloperidol, levodopa, levodopa with benserazide, levodopa with carbidopa, lisuride, loxapine, mesoridazine, molindolone, naxagolide, olanzapine, pergolide, perphenazine, pimozide, pramipexole, quetiapine, risperidone, sulpiride, tetrabenazine, trihexyphenidyl, thioridazine, thiothixene, trifluoperazine or ziprasidone.

In one aspect, the compound can be employed in combination with an anti-depressant or anti-anxiety agent, including norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors (including tertiary amine tricyclics and secondary amine tricyclics), selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs), reversible inhibitors of monoamine oxidase (RIMAs), serotonin and noradrenaline reuptake inhibitors (SNRIs), corticotropin releasing factor (CRF) antagonists, α-adrenoreceptor antagonists, neurokinin-1 receptor antagonists, atypical anti-depressants, benzodiazepines, 5-HT1A agonists or antagonists, especially 5-HT1A partial agonists, and corticotropin releasing factor (CRF) antagonists. Specific agents include: amitriptyline, clomipramine, doxepin, imipramine and trimipramine; amoxapine, desipramine, maprotiline, nortriptyline and protriptyline; fluoxetine, fluvoxamine, paroxetine and sertraline; isocarboxazid, phenelzine, tranylcypromine and selegiline; moclobemide: venlafaxine; duloxetine; aprepitant; bupropion, lithium, nefazodone, trazodone and viloxazine; alprazolam, chlordiazepoxide, clonazepam, chlorazepate, diazepam, halazepam, lorazepam, oxazepam and prazepam; buspirone, flesinoxan, gepirone and ipsapirone, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In the treatment of conditions which require activation of the muscarinic receptor an appropriate dosage level will generally be about 0.01 to 500 mg per kg patient body weight per day which can be administered in single or multiple doses. Preferably, the dosage level will be about 0.1 to about 250 mg/kg per day; more preferably about 0.5 to about 100 mg/kg per day. A suitable dosage level can be about 0.01 to 250 mg/kg per day, about 0.05 to 100 mg/kg per day, or about 0.1 to 50 mg/kg per day. Within this range the dosage can be 0.05 to 0.5, 0.5 to 5 or 5 to 50 mg/kg per day. For oral administration, the compositions are preferably provided in the form of tablets containing 1.0 to 1000 milligrams of the active ingredient, particularly 1.0, 5.0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 900, and 1000 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage to the patient to be treated. The compounds can be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day. This dosage regimen can be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and frequency of dosage for any particular patient can be varied and will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the metabolic stability and length of action of that compound, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, mode and time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity of the particular condition, and the host undergoing therapy.

Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to methods for activating or modulating muscarinic receptor in at least one cell, comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with at least one compound of the invention, in an amount effective to modulate or activate mAChR M₁ activity response in the at least one cell. In a further aspect, the cell is mammalian, for example human. In a further aspect, the cell has been isolated from a subject prior to the contacting step. In a further aspect, contacting is via administration to a subject.

a. Treating a Disorder Associated with Muscarinic Acetylcholine Receptor Activity

In one aspect, the invention relates to a method for the treatment of a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction in a mammal comprising the step of administering to the mammal an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound of the method is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In a further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 5,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 2,500 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 1,000 nM. In a further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 500 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 250 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 100 nM.

In a further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10,000 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 5,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 2,500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 1,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR A M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 250 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 100 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity is positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ activity.

In one aspect the mammal is a human. In a further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step. In a still further aspect, the method further comprises the step of identifying a mammal in need of treatment of the disorder.

In a further aspect, the disorder is a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with mAChR M₁ dysfunction. In a still further aspect, the disorder is selected from psychosis, schizophrenia, conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, bipolar, disorder, psychotic episodes of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, psychotic mood disorders such as severe major depressive disorder, mood disorders associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, mood disorders associated with schizophrenia, behavioral manifestations of mental retardation, conduct disorder, autistic disorder; movement disorders, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, movement disorders associated with Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia, drug induced and neurodegeneration based dyskinesias, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, cognitive disorders, dementias, and memory disorders. In a yet further aspect, the disorder is selected from Alzheimer's disease, schizophrenia, a sleep disorder, a pain disorder and a cognitive disorder. In an even further aspect, the disorder is Alzheimer's disease. In a still further aspect, the pain disorder is selected from neuropathic pain, central pain syndrome, postsurgical pain syndrome, bone and joint pain, repetitive motion pain, dental pain, cancer pain, myofascial pain, perioperative pain, chronic pain, dysmenorrhea, inflammatory pain, headache, migraine headache, cluster headache, headache, primary hyperalgesia, secondary hyperalgesis, primary allodynia, and secondary allodynia.

b. Potentiation of Muscarinic Acetylcholine Receptor Activity

In one aspect, the invention relates to a method for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal comprising the step of administering to the mammal an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound of the method is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In a further aspect, potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity increases muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity. In a still further aspect, potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity is partial agonism of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor. In a yet further aspect, potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity is partial allosteric modulation of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor.

In a further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 5,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 2,500 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 1,000 nM. In a further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 500 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 250 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 100 nM.

In a further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10,000 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 5,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 2,500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 1,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 250 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 100 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound of the method exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity is positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ activity.

In one aspect, the mammal is a human. In a further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity prior to the administering step. In a still further aspect, the method further comprises the step of identifying a mammal in need of potentiating muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity. In a yet further aspect, the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor is mAChR M₁. In an even further aspect, potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity treats a disorder associated with mAChR M₁ activity in the mammal.

In a further aspect, potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal treats a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder. In a yet further aspect, the neurological and/or psychiatric disorder is associated with a mAChR M₁ dysfunction. In a still further aspect, the disorder is selected from psychosis, schizophrenia, conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, bipolar disorder, psychotic episodes of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, psychotic mood disorders such as severe major depressive disorder, mood disorders associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, mood disorders associated with schizophrenia, behavioral manifestations of mental retardation, conduct disorder, autistic disorder; movement disorders, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, movement disorders associated with Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia, drug induced and neurodegeneration based dyskinesias, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, cognitive disorders, dementias, and memory disorders. In a yet further aspect, the disorder is selected from Alzheimer's disease, schizophrenia, a sleep disorder, a pain disorder and a cognitive disorder. In an even further aspect, the disorder is Alzheimer's disease. In a still further aspect, the pain disorder is selected from neuropathic pain, central pain syndrome, postsurgical pain syndrome, bone and joint pain, repetitive motion pain, dental pain, cancer pain, myofascial pain, perioperative pain, chronic pain, dysmenorrhea, inflammatory pain, headache, migraine headache, cluster headache, headache, primary hyperalgesia, secondary hyperalgesis, primary allodynia, and secondary allodynia.

c. Potentiating Muscarinic Acetylcholine Receptor Activity in Cells

In one aspect, the invention relates to a method for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal comprising the step of contacting at least one cell with at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound contacting the cell is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In various aspects, the cell is contacted with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In a further aspect, the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor is mAChR M₁.

In a further aspect, potentiation of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity increases muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity. In a still further aspect, potentiation of the muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity is partial agonism of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity. In a yet further aspect, potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity is partial allosteric modulation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity.

In a further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 5,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 2,500 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 1,000 nM. In a further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 500 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 250 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 100 nM.

In a further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10,000 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 5,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 2,500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 1,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 250 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 100 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound contacting the cell exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity is positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ activity.

In one aspect, the cell is mammalian. In a still further aspect, the cell is human. In a yet further aspect, the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step. In an even further aspect, contacting is via administration to a mammal.

In a further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity prior to the administering step. In a still further aspect, the method further comprises the step of identifying a mammal in need of potentiating muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity.

In a further aspect, the potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity treats a muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction. In a yet further aspect, the potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity treats a disorder associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction in the mammal. In a still further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity prior to the administering step. In an even further aspect, treatment further comprises the step of identifying a mammal in need of potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity.

In a further aspect, potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in at least one cell treats a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder. In a still further aspect, the neurological and/or psychiatric disorder is associated with a mAChR M₁ dysfunction. In a still further aspect, the disorder is selected from psychosis, schizophrenia, conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, bipolar disorder, psychotic episodes of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, psychotic mood disorders such as severe major depressive disorder, mood disorders associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, mood disorders associated with schizophrenia, behavioral manifestations of mental retardation, conduct disorder, autistic disorder, movement disorders, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, movement disorders associated with Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia, drug induced and neurodegeneration based dyskinesias, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, cognitive disorders, dementias, and memory disorders. In a yet further aspect, the disorder is selected from Alzheimer's disease, schizophrenia, a sleep disorder, a pain disorder and a cognitive disorder. In an even further aspect, the disorder is Alzheimer's disease. In a still further aspect, the pain disorder is selected from neuropathic pain, central pain syndrome, postsurgical pain syndrome, bone and joint pain, repetitive motion pain, dental pain, cancer pain, myofascial pain, perioperative pain, chronic pain, dysmenorrhea, inflammatory pain, headache, migraine headache, cluster headache, headache, primary hyperalgesia, secondary hyperalgesis, primary allodynia, and secondary allodynia.

2. Cotherapeutic Methods

The present invention is further directed to administration of a selective mAChR M₁ potentiator for improving treatment outcomes in the context of cognitive or behavioral therapy. That is, in one aspect, the invention relates to a cotherapeutic method comprising the step of administering to a mammal an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound of the cotherapeutic method is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In a further aspect, administration improves treatment outcomes in the context of cognitive or behavioral therapy. Administration in connection with cognitive or behavioral therapy can be continuous or intermittent. Administration need not be simultaneous with therapy and can be before, during, and/or after therapy. For example, cognitive or behavioral therapy can be provided within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 days before or after administration of the compound. As a further example, cognitive or behavioral therapy can be provided within 1, 2, 3, or 4 weeks before or after administration of the compound. As a still further example, cognitive or behavioral therapy can be provided before or after administration within a period of time of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 half-lives of the administered compound. It is understood that the disclosed cotherapeutic methods can be used in connection with the disclosed compounds, compositions, kits, and uses.

3. Manufacture of a Medicament

In one aspect, the invention relates to a medicament comprising one or more disclosed compounds, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or one or more products of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound of the medicament is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In various aspects, the medicament comprises an effective amount of one or more disclosed compounds, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of one or more products of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In various aspect, the invention relates methods for the manufacture of a medicament for modulating the activity mAChR M₁ (e.g., treatment of one or more neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with mAChR M₁ dysfunction) in mammals (e.g., humans) comprising combining one or more disclosed compounds, products, or compositions or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, or polymorph thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. It is understood that the disclosed methods can be performed with the disclosed compounds, products, and pharmaceutical compositions. It is also understood that the disclosed methods can be employed in connection with the disclosed methods of using.

4. Use of Compounds

Also provided are the uses of the disclosed compounds and products. In one aspect, the invention relates to use of a compound of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or use of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In various aspects, the compound of the use is a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In various aspects, the use comprises use of an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or use of an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further aspect, the use comprises use of an effective amount of a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making. In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In a further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 10,000 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 5,000 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 2,500 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 1,000 nM. In a further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 500 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 250 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of less than about 100 nM.

In a further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10,000 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 5,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 2,500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 1,000 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 500 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 250 nM to about 1 nM. In a still further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 100 nM to about 1 nM. In an even further aspect, the compound used exhibits potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity with an EC₅₀ of between from about 10 nM to about 1 nM. In a yet further aspect, potentiation of mAChR M₁ activity is positive allosteric modulation of mAChR M₁ activity.

In a further aspect, the use relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, for use as a medicament.

In a further aspect, the use relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, wherein a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intimately mixed with a therapeutically effective amount of the compound or the product of a disclosed method of making.

In various aspects, the use relates to a treatment of a disorder in a mammal. Also disclosed is the use of a compound for mAChR M₁ receptor activation. In one aspect, the use is characterized in that the mammal is a human. In one aspect, the use is characterized in that the disorder is a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with a muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction. In one aspect, the neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction is treated by potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal.

In a further aspect, the use relates to the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with a muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction in a mammal. In a further aspect, the medicament is used in the treatment of a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with a muscarinic acetylcholine receptor dysfunction in a mammal.

In a further aspect, the use relates to potentiation of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal. In a further aspect, the use relates to partial agonism of muscarinic acetylcholine receptor activity in a mammal. In a further aspect, the use relates to modulating mAChR M₁ activity in a mammal. In a still further aspect, the use relates to modulating mAChR M₁ activity in a cell. In a yet further aspect, the use relates to partial allosteric agonism of mAChR M₁ in a cell. In an even further aspect, the mammal is a human.

In a further aspect, the use is treatment of a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder. In an even further aspect, the disorder is a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder associated with M₁ receptor activity. In a yet further aspect, disorder is selected from psychosis, schizophrenia, conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, bipolar disorder, psychotic episodes of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, psychotic mood disorders such as severe major depressive disorder; mood disorders associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, mood disorders associated with schizophrenia, behavioral manifestations of mental retardation, conduct disorder, autistic disorder; movement disorders, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, movement disorders associated dyskinesias, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, cognitive disorders, dementias, and memory disorders. In an even further aspect, the disorder is selected from Alzheimer's disease, schizophrenia, a sleep disorder, a pain disorder and a cognitive disorder. In a still further aspect, the disorder is Alzheimer's disease. In a still further aspect, wherein the pain disorder is selected from neuropathic pain, central pain syndrome, postsurgical pain syndrome, bone and joint pain, repetitive motion pain, dental pain, cancer pain, myofascial pain, perioperative pain, chronic pain, dysmenorrhea, inflammatory pain, headache, migraine headache, cluster headache, headache, primary hyperalgesia, secondary hyperalgesis, primary allodynia, and secondary allodynia.

It is understood that the disclosed uses can be employed in connection with the disclosed compounds, methods, compositions, and kits. In a further aspect, the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or a disclosed product in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with mAChR M₁ receptor dysfunction in a mammal. In a further aspect, the disorder is a neurological and/or psychiatric disorder.

5. Kits

In one aspect, the invention relates to kits comprising at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and one or more of:

-   -   (a) at least one agent known to increase mAChR M₁ activity;     -   (b) at least one agent known to decrease mAChR M₁ activity;     -   (c) at least one agent known to treat a disorder associated with         cholinergic activity;     -   (d) instructions for treating a disorder associated with         cholinergic activity;     -   (e) instructions for treating a disorder associated with mAChR         M₁ receptor activity; or     -   (f) instructions for administering the compound in connection         with cognitive or behavioral therapy.

In various further aspects, the kit comprises an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or an effective amount of at least one product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a yet further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.

In various further aspects, the invention relates to kits comprising at least one disclosed compound or at least one product of a disclosed method and at least one agent known to have M₁ receptor agonist activity.

In a further aspect, the kit comprises a solvate or polymorph of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method of making.

In a further aspect, the at least one compound and the at least one agent are co-formulated. In a still further aspect, the at least one compound and the at least one agent are co-packaged.

The kits can also comprise compounds and/or products co-packaged, co-formulated, and/or co-delivered with other components. For example, a drug manufacturer, a drug reseller, a physician, a compounding shop, or a pharmacist can provide a kit comprising a disclosed compound and/or product and another component for delivery to a patient.

It is understood that the disclosed kits can be prepared from the disclosed compounds, products, and pharmaceutical compositions. It is also understood that the disclosed kits can be employed in connection with the disclosed methods of using.

6. Subjects

The subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a vertebrate, such as a mammal, a fish, a bird, a reptile, or an amphibian. Thus, the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non-human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig or rodent. The term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered. A patient refers to a subject afflicted with a disease or disorder. The term “patient” includes human and veterinary subjects.

In some aspects of the disclosed methods, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with a disorder treatable by activation or modulation of the muscarinic receptor and/or a need for activation or modulation of muscarinic receptor activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with anxiety or a related disorder prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed methods, the subject has been identified with a need for treatment prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been identified with a disorder treatable by activation of the muscarinic receptor and/or or a need for activation/modulation of muscarinic activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been identified with anxiety or a related disorder prior to the administering step. In one aspect, a subject can be treated prophylactically with a compound or composition disclosed herein, as discussed herein elsewhere.

F. Experimental

The following examples are put forth so as to provide those of ordinary skill in the art with a complete disclosure and description of how the compounds, compositions, articles, devices and/or methods claimed herein are made and evaluated, and are intended to be purely exemplary of the invention and are not intended to limit the scope of what the inventors regard as their invention. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers (e.g., amounts, temperature, etc.), but some errors and deviations should be accounted for. Unless indicated otherwise, parts are parts by weight, temperature is in ° C. or is at ambient temperature, and pressure is at or near atmospheric.

Several methods for preparing the compounds of this invention are illustrated in the following Examples. Starting materials and the requisite intermediates are in some cases commercially available, or can be prepared according to literature procedures or as illustrated herein. The Examples are provided herein to illustrate the invention, and should not be construed as limiting the invention in any way. The Examples are typically depicted in free base form, according to the IUPAC naming convention. Examples are provided herein to illustrate the invention, and should not be construed as limiting the invention in any way.

As indicated, some of the Examples were obtained as racemic mixtures of one or more enantiomers or diastereomers. The compounds may be separated by one skilled in the art to isolate individual enantiomers. Separation can be carried out by the coupling of a racemic mixture of compounds to an enantiomerically pure compound to form a diastereomeric mixture, followed by separation of the individual diastereomers by standard methods, such as fractional crystallization or chromatography. A racemic or diastereomeric mixture of the compounds can also be separated directly by chromatographic methods using chiral stationary phases.

The following abbreviations are used throughout the application: the term “EtOAc” means ethyl acetate, “DCM” means dichloromethane, “DIPEA” means N,N-diisopropylethylamine, “DMF” means N,N-dimethylformamide, “DTBAD” means di-tert-butyl azodicarboxylate, “HATU” means 2-(7-aza-1H-benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate, “LC-MS” means liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry, “MeCN” means acetonitrile, “MeOH” means methanol, “[M+H]” means the protonated mass of the free base of the compound, “NBS” means N-bromosuccinimide, “NMR” means nuclear magnetic resonance, “R_(t)” means retention time (in minutes), “TFA” means trifluoroacetic acid, “THF” means tetrahydrofuran, “it” or “r.t.” means room temperature.

1. General Methods

¹H NMR spectra were recorded either on a Bruker DPX-400 or on a Bruker AV-500 spectrometer with standard pulse sequences, operating at 400 MHz and 500 MHz respectively. Chemical shifts (δ) are reported in parts per million (ppm) downfield from tetramethylsilane (TMS), which was used as internal standard.

Microwave assisted reactions were performed in a single-mode reactor: Emrys™ Optimizer microwave reactor (Personal Chemistry A.B., currently Biotage).

Hydrogenation reactions conducted under positive pressure were performed in a continuous flow hydrogenator H-CUBE® from ThalesNano Nanotechnology Inc. or using a Parr hydrogenation shaker apparatus.

Analytical thin layer chromatography was performed on Analtech silica gel GF 250 micron plates using reagent grade solvents. Normal phase flash silica gel-based column chromatography was performed using ready-to-connect cartridges from ISCO, on irregular silica gel, particle size 15-40 μm on a Combi-flash Companion chromatography system from ISCO.

Low resolution mass spectra were obtained on an Agilent 1200 series 6130 mass spectrometer. High resolution mass spectra were recorded on a Waters Q-TOF API-US. Analytical HPLC was performed on an HP1100 with UV detection at 214 and 254 nm along with ELSD detection, LC/MS (J-Sphere80-C18, 3.0×50 mm, 4.1 min gradient, 5%[0.05% TFA/CH₃CN]:95%[0.05% TFA/H₂O] to 100%[0.05% TFA/CH₃CN]. Preparative RP-HPLC purification was performed on a custom HP1100 automated purification system with collection triggered by mass detection or using a Gilson Inc. preparative UV-based system using a Phenomenex Luna C18 column (50×30 mm I.D., 5 □m) with an acetonitrile (unmodified)-water (0.1% TFA) custom gradient.

Chiral purification of racemic mixtures was readily accomplished using a supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC) instrument from Thar Scientific Instruments. Chiral analytical and semi-prep SFC purification columns were from Chiral Technologies.

2. LC-MS Method

The HPLC measurement was performed using an Agilent 1200 system comprising a binary pump with degasser, an autos ampler, a column oven, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below. Flow from the column was split to a SQ mass spectrometer and Polymer Labs ELSD. The MS detector was configured with an ES ionization source. Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. The source temperature was maintained at 350° C. Data acquisition was performed with Agilent Chemstation software. Reversed phase HPLC was carried out on a Kinetex C18 column (2.6 μm, 2.1×30 μm) from Phenomenex, with a flow rate of 1.5 mL/min, at 45° C. The gradient conditions used are: 93% A (water+0.1% TFA), 7% B (acetonitrile), to 95% B in 1.1 minutes, returning to initial conditions at 1.11 minutes. Injection volume 1 μL. Low-resolution mass spectra (single quadruple MSD detector) were acquired in electrospray mode by scanning from 100 to 700 in 0.25 seconds, step size of 0.1 and peak width of 0.03 minutes. The capillary needle voltage was 3.0 kV and the fragmentor voltage was 100 V.

3. Intermediate Example I a. Preparation of (2,6-difluoro-4-(2-methyl-2H-indazol-4-yl)phenyl)methanamine

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added (4-bromo-2,6-difluorophenyl)methanamine (78.0 mg, 0.351 mmol, 1.0 eq.), followed by 1,4-dioxane (2.0 mL) and H₂O (0.2 mL). To this mixture was added 2-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2H-indazole (109.0 mg, 0.422 mmol, 1.2 eq.), cesium carbonate (343 mg, 1.05 mmol, 3.0 eq.), and PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂ (28.7 mg, 0.035 mmol, 0.1 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 120° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and quenched with saturated aqueous NH₄Cl solution (5.0 mL). The product was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×). The organic layers were combined, dried over Na₂SO₄, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to provide the title compounds as oil (83.2 mg, 87%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.00 (s, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (dd, J=8.6, 6.9 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (m, 2H), 7.1 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.22 (s, 3H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 1.57 (br s, 2H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 273.9.

4. Intermediate Example II A. Preparation of (4-(2,7-dimethyl-2H-indazol-4-yl)-2-fluorophenyl)methanamine

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added [(4-(aminomethyl)-3-fluoro-phenyl)boronic acid hydrochloride (200.0 mg, 0.98 mmol, 1.0 eq.), followed by 1,4-dioxane (5.0 mL) and H₂O (0.5 mL). To this mixture were added 4-bromo-2,7-dimethyl-2H-indazole (265 mg, 1.18 mmol, 1.2 eq.), cesium carbonate (1.28 g, 3.92 mmol, 4.0 eq.), and PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂ (40.0 mg, 0.049 mmol, 0.05 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 120° C. overnight before cooling to room temperature and quenching with saturated aqueous NH₄Cl solution (5.0 mL). The product was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×). The organic layers were combined, dried over Na₂SO₄, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to provide the title compounds as an oil (229 mg, 86%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.03 (s, 1H), 7.41 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 2H), 7.33 (m, 1H), 7.12 (m, 1H), 7.06 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.25 (s, 3H), 3.97 (s, 2H), 2.66 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 3H), 1.90 (br s, 2H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 270.0.

5. Intermediate Example III A. Preparation of 2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzaldehyde oxime

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added 2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzaldehyde (200 mg, 1.05 mmol, 1.0 eq.), followed by ethanol (5.0 mL). To this mixture were added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (110 mg, 1.58 mmol, 1.5 eq.) and sodium acetate (129 mg, 1.58 mmol, 1.5 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was filtered, and the solids were washed with CH₂Cl₂ (3×). The filtrate was dried over Na₂SO₄, concentrated in vacuo, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to provide the title compound as a solid (216 mg, 100%). ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 206.0.

b. Preparation of (2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)phenyl)methanamine

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added 2-fluoro-4-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)benzaldehyde oxime (216 mg, 1.05 mmol, 1.0 eq.) followed by acetic acid (5.0 mL). To this mixture was added Zn dust (550 mg, 8.41 mmol, 8.0 eq.) in three equal portions. The reaction mixture was sonicated for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite pad and rinsed with CH₂Cl₂. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to afford the title compound as a solid (200 mg, 99%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.99 (t, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (t, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.17 (m, 2H), 6.48 (m, 1H), 3.92 (s, 2H), 1.49 (br s, 2H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 192.0.

6. Intermediate Example IV A. Preparation of methyl 3-(bromomethyl)-6-chloropicolinate

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added methyl 6-chloro-3-methylpicolinate (750 mg, 4.04 mmol, 1.0 eq.), followed by CCl₄ (15.0 mL). To this mixture was added N-bromosuccinimide (1.44 g, 8.08 mmol, 2.0 eq.), benzoyl peroxide (29.4 mg, 0.12 mmol, 0.03 eq.), and acetic acid (231 μL, 4.04 mmol, 1.0 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 100° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and quenched with saturated aqueous NH₄Cl solution (10 mL). The mixture was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×). The organic layers were combined, dried over Na₂SO₄, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to provide the desired compound as a solid (735 mg, 68%). ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 265.8.

b. Preparation of 2-chloro-6-(2-fluoro-4-(2-methyl-2H-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)-5,6-dihydro-7H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added methyl 3-(bromomethyl)-6-chloropicolinate (200 mg, 0.76 mmol, 1.0 eq.), followed by acetonitrile (6.0 mL). To this mixture was added [2-fluoro-4-(2-methylindazol-5-yl)phenyl]methanamine (235 mg, 0.92 mmol, 1.2 eq.) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (75.0 μL, 0.43 mmol, 0.57 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered. The solid was collected, washed with cold CH₃CN (2×), and air dried to obtain the title compound as a solid (161 mg, 52%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.80 (s, 1H), 7.75 (t, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.50 (dd, J=9.1, 1.8 Hz, 111), 7.45 (dd, J=7.9, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (dd, J=7.9, 1.7 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (dd, J=11.2, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (s, 2H), 4.38 (s, 2H), 4.25 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 406.8.

7. Intermediate Example V A. Preparation of tert-butyl (6-(2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzyl)-7-oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)carbamate

To a microwave vial containing a magnetic stir bar was added 2-chloro-6-[[2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methylpyrazol-4-yl)phenyl]methyl]-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one (187 mg, 0.50 mmol, 1.0 eq.), tert-butyl carbamate (87.9 mg, 0.75 mmol, 1.5 eq.), sodium tert-butoxide (72.1 mg, 0.75 mmol, 1.5 eq.), 2-di-tert-butylphosphino-2,4,6-triisopropylbiphenyl (19.1 mg, 0.045 mmol, 0.09) and tri(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (13.7 mg, 0.015 mmol, 0.03), The vial was evacuated and purged with nitrogen (3×). Toluene (5.0 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60° C. for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and diluted with ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous NH₄Cl. The organic layer was separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel afforded the title compound as a white powder (83 mg, 36%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 10.18 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=8.9 Hz, 2H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 4.33 (s, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 1.47 (s, 9H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 456.3.

b. Preparation of 2-amino-6-(2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzyl)-5,6-dihydro-7H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one (8)

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added tert-butyl (6-(2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzyl)-7-oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-2-yl)carbamate (83 mg, 0.18 mmol, 1.0 eq.), which was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (0.90 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (0.45 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The resultant solid was dissolved in methanol and filtered through an Agilent Bond Elut SCX cartridge which was subsequently washed with 7M ammonia in methanol solution (3×). The filtrate containing product was collected and concentrated in vacuo to provide the title compound (40 mg, 62%) as a white powder. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (d, J=8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.58 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.26 (s, 2H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 4.14 (s, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 256.2.

8. Intermediate Example VI A. Preparation of methyl 6-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-methylpicolinate

A degassed mixture of methyl 6-chloro-3-methylpicolinate (1.00 g, 5.39 mmol), tert-butyl carbamate (757 mg, 6.47 mmol), Cs₂CO₃ (3.53 g, 10.78 mmol), X-Phos (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triispropylbiphenyl) (257 mg, 0.539 mmol), and Pd(OAc)₂ (60.5 mg, 0.269 mmol) in 15 mL of 1,4-dioxane was stirred at 90° C. for 2 h under an inert atmosphere. The mixture was diluted with methylene chloride and filtered through Celite, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (hex/EtOAc) to give the title compound as a white solid (1.28 g, 89%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.01 (d, J=8.5, 1H), 7.60 (d, J=8.5, 1H), 7.36 (br s, 1H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 2.53 (s, 3H), 1.52 (s, 9H). ES-MS [M+1]⁺=267.4.

b. Preparation of methyl 3-(bromomethyl)-6-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)picolinate

To a solution of methyl 6-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-methylpicolinate (1.28 g, 4.81 mmol) in CCl₄ (25 mL) was added NBS (941 mg, 5.29 mmol) and benzoyl peroxide (116 mg, 0.481 mmol). The resulting solution was heated to 100° C. for 45 min, after which time it was cooled to r.t. and solids were removed by filtration. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure, and residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (hex/EtOAc) to give the title compounds as a pale yellow solid, which was inseparable from remaining starting material (3:2 product/starting material by ¹H NMR), (1.22 g, 74%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.12 (d, J=8.6, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=8.7, 1H), 7.47 (br s, 1H), 4.88 (s, 2H), 4.02 (s, 3H), 1.53 (s, 9H). ES-MS [M+1]⁺=346.2.

9. Intermediate Example VII A. Preparation of tert-butyl N-[6-[[2-fluoro-4-(2-methylindazol-4-yl)phenyl]methyl]-7-oxo-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-2-yl]carbamate

Methyl 3-(bromomethyl)-6-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)picolinate (30 mg, 0.087 mmol) and 2-fluoro-4-(2-methylindazol-4-yl)phenyl]methanamine (33.3 mg, 0.130 mmol) were dissolved in MeCN (5 mL), and DIPEA (0.076 mL, 0.435 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at r.t. overnight, after which time solvents were removed under reduced pressure, and the resulting residue was purified by reverse phase chromatography. The resulting solution was basified with sat. NaHCO₃, and extracted with DCM to give the title compound as a white solid (10.7 mg, 25%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.10 (d, J=8.5, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=8.5, 1H), 7.63 (d, J=8.7, 1H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 7.44-7.26 (m, 4H), 7.06 (d, J=6.9, 1H), 4.90 (s, 2H), 4.30 (s, 2H), 4.17 (s, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H). ES-MS [M+1]⁺=488.3.

b. Preparation of 2-amino-6-[[2-fluoro-4-(2-methylindazol-4-yl)phenyl]methyl]-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one

tert-Butyl N-[6-[[2-fluoro-4-(2-methylindazol-4-yl)phenyl]methyl]-7-oxo-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b)]pyridin-2-yl]carbamate (10.7 mg, 0.022 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (2 mL), and TFA (0.5 mL) was added. The reaction was stirred at r.t. for 45 min, after which time the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, and purified using an Agilent Bond Elut SCX cartridge which was subsequently washed with 7M NH₃ in MeOH solution to give the title compound as a white solid (8.5 mg, 99%). NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.53-7.49 (m, 2H), 7.44-7.34 (m, 3H), 7.27 (t, J=7.8, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=6.9, 1H), 6.64 (d, J=8.5, 1H), 4.83 (s, 2H), 4.21 (s, 2H), 4.12 (s, 3H). ES-MS [M+1]⁺=388.2.

10. Analog Example I A. Preparation of 7-(2-fluoro-4-(2-methyl-2H-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)-6,7-dihydro-8H-pyrrolo [3,4-e][1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyridin-8-one (Compound 9)

To a microwave vial containing a magnetic stir bar was added compound 6 (20.0 mg, 0.049 mmol, 1.0 eq.), which was dissolved in THF (1.0 mL). To this mixture was added hydrazine (77 μL, 2.46 mmol, 50 eq.). The vial was capped, and the reaction mixture was stirred at 160° C. for 50 minutes under microwave irradiation. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and triethyl orthoformate (0.5 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 180° C. for 1 hour under microwave irradiation. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by reverse phase chromatography to provide the title compound as a solid (12.8 mg, 63%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.64 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.80 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.42 (dd, J=7.9, 1.7 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (d, J=9.4 Hz, 2H), 4.93 (s, 2H), 4.51 (s, 2H), 4.25 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 412.8.

11. Analog Example II A. Preparation of 7-(2,6-difluoro-4-(2-methyl-2h-indazol-4-yl)benzyl)-6,7-dihydro-8H-pyrrolo[3,4-e][1,2,4]triazolo [4,3-a]pyridin-8-one (Compound 1)

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added 2-chloro-6-(2,6-difluoro-4-(2-methyl-2H-indazol-4-yl)benzyl)-5,6-dihydro-7H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one (30.0 m g, 0.071 mmol, 1.0 eq.), which was dissolved in n-butanol (0.5 mL). To this mixture was added formic hydrazide (63.6 mg, 1.06 mmol, 15 eq.) The reaction mixture was stirred at 160° C. overnight and subsequently cooled to room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and the residue was purified by reverse phase chromatography to provide the title compound as a solid (3.1 mg, 10%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.65 (m, 1H), 8.11 (m, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (dd, J=8.7, 7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.17 (m, 1H), 5.02 (s, 2H), 4.56 (s, 2H), 4.27 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 430.8.

12. Analog Example III A. Preparation of 7-(2-fluoro-4-(2-methyl-2H-indazol-4-yl)benzyl)-6,7-dihydro-8H-pyrrolo [3,4-e][1,2,4]triazol[4,3-a]pyridin-8-one (Compound 2)

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added 7-(4-bromo-2-fluorobenzyl)-6,7-dihydro-8H-pyrrolo[3,4-e][1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyridin-8-one (17.0 mg, 0.047 mmol, 1.0 eq.), followed by DMF (1.0 mL) and H₂O (0.1 mL). To this mixture was added 2-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2H-indazole (14.6 mg, 0.056 mmol, 1.2 eq.), cesium carbonate (76.6 mg, 0.24 mmol, 5.0 eq.), and PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂ (4.0 mg, 0.005 mmol, 0.1 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred at 100° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and quenched with saturated aqueous NH₄Cl solution (1.0 mL). The mixture was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (3×). The organic layers were combined, dried over Na₂SO₄, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by reverse phase chromatography to provide the title compound as a solid (8.3 mg, 42%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.65 (s, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (dd, J=7.9, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.40 (m, 2H), 7.37 (dd, J=8.7, 7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (s, 2H), 4.56 (s, 2H), 4.26 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 412.8.

13. Analog Example IV

a. Preparation of 2-(2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzyl)-2,3-dihydro-1H-imidazo[1,2-a]pyrrolo[3,4-e]pyridin-1-one (Compound 28)

To a flask containing a magnetic stir bar was added compound 8 (10 mg, 0.028 mmol, 1.0 eq.), NaHCO₃ (4.73 mg, 0.056 mmol, 2.0 eq.), and ethanol (0.28 mL). To this suspension was added chloroacetaldehyde solution (50% in water, 5.36 μL, 0.084 mmol, 3.0 eq.), and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water, cold ethanol, and diethyl ether, and collected. The solid was further purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 5.8 mg (54%) of the title compound as a white solid. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-ds) δ 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.0 (d, J=0.6 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (dd, J=9.1, 0.5 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 4.83 (s, 2H), 4.48 (s, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 380.3.

14. Analog Example V A. Preparation of 2-(2-fluoro-4-(2-methyl-2H-indazol-4-yl)benzyl)-2,3-dihydro-1H-imidazo[1,2-a]pyrrolo[3,4-e]pyridin-1-one

2-Amino-6-[[2-fluoro-4-(2-methylindazol-4-yl)phenyl]methyl]-5H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridin-7-one (8.4 mg, 0.022 mmol) was dissolved in water (2 mL) and 50% chloroacetaldehyde solution in water (0.055 mL, 0.22 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated to 80° C. in a capped vial for 2 h, after which time LCMS indicated full conversion. The reaction mixture was cooled to r.t., and basified with sat. NaHCO₃, and extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers were concentrated to give the title compound as pale solid (3.3 mg, 37%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CD₃OD) δ 8.48 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.72-7.68 (m, 2H), 7.50 (d, J=8.6, 1H), 7.44-7.39 (m, 4H), 7.27 (t, J=7.8, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=6.9, 1H), 4.89 (s, 2H), 4.48 (s, 2H), 4.12 (s, 3H). ES-MS [M+1]⁺=412.2.

15. Analog Example VI A. Preparation of N-(6-(2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzyl)-7-oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-pyrrolo [3,4-b]pyridin-2-n′-hydroxyformimidamide

In a flask containing a magnetic stir bar, compound 8 (40 mg, 0.084 mmol, 1.0 eq.) was dissolved in 2-propanol (0.42 mL). To this solution was added N,N-dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal (22.4 μL, 0.17 mmol, 2.0 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at 83° C. for 2 hours. ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 411.3. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (11.7 mg, 0.17 mmol, 2.0 eq.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 50° C. After 2 hours, the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting solid was used in the next reaction without further purification. ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 399.3.

b. preparation of 7-(2,6-difluoro-4-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzyl)-6,7-dihydro-8H-pyrrolo[3,4-e][1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-8-one (Compound 31)

In a flask containing a magnetic stir bar, compound 13 (45 mg, 0.11 mmol, 1.0 eq.) was dissolved in THF (0.45 mL). The solution was cooled to 0° C., and trifluoroacetic anhydride (160 uL, 1.13 mmol, 10 eq.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. Saturated aqueous NaHCO₃ was added. The mixture was extracted with CH₃Cl/2-propanol (3:1, 3×). The combined organic layers were concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 5.6 mg (13%) of the title compound as a white solid. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=0.5 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 2H), 4.90 (s, 2H), 4.59 (s, 2H), 3.92 (s, 3H); ES-MS [M+1]⁺: 381.2.

16. Characterization of Exemplary Compounds

The compounds in Tables Ia and Ib were synthesized with methods identical or analogous to those described herein above. The Synthetic Example indicated in Table I refers to the compound identified above and corresponding synthetic method described therein. The requisite starting materials were commercially available, described in the literature, or readily synthesized by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis. The mass spectrometry data were obtained LC-MS method as described above, with the LC retentions as indicated in the table below.

TABLE I Intermediate Compound Synthesis Synthesis No. Compound MS Route Route 1

430.8 I, IV II 2

412.8 IV III 3

380.8 I, IV I 4

409.9 I, IV I 5

427.8 I, IV I 6

430.8 I, IV I 7

407.8 I, IV I 8

426.8 II, IV I 9

412.8 I, IV I 10

409.8 I, IV I 11

362.9 I, IV I 12

348.9 III, IV I 13

427.8 I, IV I 14

394.8 I, IV I 15

444.8 I, IV I 16

426.8 I, IV I 17

426.8 II, IV I 18

440.8 II, IV I 19

444.8 I, IV I 20

440.8 II, IV I 21

363.2 I, IV I 22

413.3 I, IV I 23

413.2 I, IV I 24

410.2 I, IV I 25

410.2 I, IV I 26

390.2 I, IV I 27

362.3 I, IV, V IV 28

380.3 I, IV, V IV 29

394.2 I, IV, V IV 30

363.2 I, IV, V VI 31

381.2 I, IV, V VI 32

430.2 I, VI, VII V 33

412.2 VI, VII V 34

412.2 VI, VII V 35

430.2 VI, VII V 36

279.2 VI, VII V 37

332.2 VI, VII V 38

350.2 VI, VII V 39

427.2 VI, VII V 40

348.2 VI, VII V 41

321.2 VI, VII V 42

331.2 VI, VII V

17. Cell Lines Expressing Muscarinic Acetylcholine Receptors

Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) cells stably expressing rat (r)M₁ were purchased from the American Type Culture Collection and cultured according to their indicated protocol. CHO cells stably expressing human (h)M₂, hM₃, and hM₅ were described previously (Levey, et al., 1991); hM₁ and hM₄ cDNAs were purchased from Missouri S&T cDNA Resource; rM₄ cDNA was provided by T. I. Bonner (National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md.). rM₂ and rM₃ were cloned from a rat brain cDNA library and sequence verified. hM₁, rM₂, rM₃, hM₄, and rM₄ cDNAs were used to stably transfect CHO-K1 cells purchased from the American Type Culture Collection using Lipofectamine2000. To make stable rM₂, hM₂, rM₃, hM₄, and rM₄ cell lines for use in calcium mobilization assays, these cells also were stably transfected with a chimeric G-protein (G_(qi5)) (provided by B. R. Conklin, University of California, San Francisco) using Lipofectamine 2000. rM₁, hM₁, rM₃, hM₃, rM₅, and hM₅ cells were grown in Ham's F-12 medium containing 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBS), 20 mM HEPES, and 50 μg/mL G418 sulfate. rM₂-G_(qi5), hM₂-G_(qi5), and hM₄-G_(qi5) cells were grown in the same medium also containing 500 μg/mL Hygromycin B. Stable rM₄-G_(qi5) cells were grown in DMEM containing 10% heat-inactivated FBS, 20 mM HEPES, 400 μg/mL G418 sulfate, and 500 μg/mL Hygromycin B.

18. Cell-Based Functional Assay of Muscarinic Acetylcholine Receptor activity

For high throughput measurement of agonist-evoked increases in intracellular calcium, CHO-K1 cells stably expressing muscarinic receptors were plated in growth medium lacking G418 and hygromycin at 15,000 cells/20 μL/well in Greiner 384-well black-walled, tissue culture (TC)-treated, clear-bottom plates (VWR). Cells were incubated overnight at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. The next day, cells were washed using an ELX 405 (BioTek) with four washes (80 μL) of assay buffer then aspirated to 20 μL. Next, 20 μL of 16 μM Fluo-4/acetoxymethyl ester (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.) prepared as a 2.3 mM stock in DMSO and mixed in a 1:1 ratio with 10% (w/v) Pluronic F-127 and diluted in assay buffer was added to the wells and the cell plates were incubated for 50 min at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. Dye was removed by washing with the ELX 405 (four 80 μL washes of assay buffer) then aspirated to 20 μL. Compound master plates were formatted in an 11 point CRC format (1:3 dilutions) in 100% DMSO with a starting concentration of 10 mM using the BRAVO liquid handler (Agilent). Test compound CRCs were then transferred to daughter plates (240 nL) using the Echo acoustic plate reformatter (Labcyte, Sunnyvale, Calif.) and then diluted into assay buffer (40 μL) to a 2× stock using a Thermo Fisher Combi (Thermo Fisher Scientific, Waltham, Mass.).

Calcium flux was measured using the Functional Drug Screening System (FDSS) 6000 (Hamamatsu Corporation, Tokyo, Japan) as an increase in the fluorescent static ratio. Compounds were applied to cells (20 μL, 2×) using the automated system of the FDSS 6000 at 4 s into the 300 s protocol and the data were collected at 1 Hz. At 144 s into the 300s protocol, 10 μL of an EC₂₀ concentration of the muscarinic receptor agonist acetylcholine was added (5×), followed by the addition of 12 μL an EC₈O concentration of acetylcholine at the 230 s time point (5×). Agonist activity was analyzed as a concentration-dependent increase in calcium mobilization upon compound addition. Positive allosteric modulator activity was analyzed as a concentration-dependent increase in the EC₂₀ acetylcholine response. Antagonist activity was analyzed as a concentration-dependent decrease in the EC₈₀ acetylcholine response. Concentration-response curves were generated using a four-parameter logistical equation in XLfit curve fitting software (IDBS, Bridgewater, N.J.) for Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, Wash.) or Prism (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.).

The above described assay was also operated in a second mode where an appropriate fixed concentration of the present compounds were added to the cells after establishment of a fluorescence baseline for about 3 seconds, and the response in cells was measured. 140 s later the appropriate concentration of agonist was added and readings taken for an additional 106 s. Data were reduced as described above and the EC₅₀ values for the agonist in the presence of test compound were determined by nonlinear curve fitting. A decrease in the EC₅₀ value of the agonist with increasing concentrations of the present compounds (a leftward shift of the agonist concentration-response curve) is an indication of the degree of muscarinic positive allosteric modulation at a given concentration of the present compound. An increase in the EC₅₀ value of the agonist with increasing concentrations of the present compounds (a rightward shift of the agonist concentration response curve) is an indication of the degree of muscarinic antagonism at a given concentration of the present compound. The second mode also indicates whether the present compounds also affect the maximum response of the muscarinic receptor to agonists.

19. Activity of Compounds in Cell-Based Assays

Substituted 2-(4-heterocyclylbenzyl)isoindolin-1-one analogs were synthesized as described above. Activity (pEC₅₀ and E_(max)) was determined in the mAChR M₁ cell-based functional assay as described above and the data are shown in Tables IIa and IIb. The compound number corresponds to the compound numbers used in Tables Ia and Ib, respectively.

TABLE II Compound M1 ACh_(max) No. EC₅₀ (nM) (%) 1 952 (n = 2) 72 (n = 2) 2 688 78 3 656 83 4 1750 73 5 743 81 6 488 84 7 2640 70 8 1060 82 9 502 90 10 1570 84 11 856 86 12 >30,000 N/A 13 1820 57 14 1790 79 15 1240 76 16 1210 83 17 618 81 18 2140 82 19 1410 81 20 2100 84 21 >10,000 36.8 22 1310 35.3 23 1350 56.4 24 >30,000 N/A 25 >30,000 N/A 26 >30,000 N/A 27 2260 70.1 28 2370 67.7 29 >30,000 N/A 30 677 85.9 31 1630 85.3 32 1400 72 33 2200 65 34 3903 62 35 10,000 42 36 >10,000 25 37 >10,000 26 38 >10,000 26 39 857 28 40 >10,000 26 41 >10,000 38 42 >10,000 35

For compounds showing low potency (as indicated by a lack of a plateau in the concentration response curve) but greater than a 20% increase in ACh response, a potency of >10 μM is estimated.

The selectivity of the disclosed compounds for mAChR M₁ compared to mAChR M₂, M₃, M₁, and M₅ was determined using the cell-based functional assay described below using the appropriate cell-lines (prepared as described below). The EC₅₀ for each of mAChR M₂, M₃, M₄, and M₅ was greater than at least 30 μM for representative compounds (i.e., there was no receptor response up to a concentration of about 30 μM, the upper limit of compound used in the assay).

20. Prophetic In Vivo Example

Generally clinically relevant therapeutic agents for treatment of learning and memory disorders display efficacy in certain preclinical animal models. The compounds described in the preceding examples are expected to show in vivo effects in various animal behavioral models known to the skilled person, such as the reversal of scopolamine-induced disruption in contextual fear conditioning; enhancement of novel object recognition; and reversal of scopolamine-induced disruption in 8 arm radial arm maze conducted in rodent, such as rat or mouse, but may be conducted in other animal species as is convenient to the study goals. Compounds, products, and compositions disclosed herein are expected to show in vivo effects in various animal behavioral challenge models known to the skilled person, such as the reversal of scopolamine-induced disruption in contextual fear conditioning; enhancement of novel object recognition; and reversal of scopolamine-induced disruption in 8 arm radial arm maze conducted in rodent. These models are typically conducted in rodent, such as rat or mouse, but may be conducted in other animal species as is convenient to the study goals.

a. Contextual Fear Conditioning Model

An exemplary suitable assay for determination of the in vivo effects of the disclosed compounds is assessment of the reversal of scopolamine-induced disruption in contextual fear conditioning. Such activity may be assessed according to the method described herein below.

Subjects: Male adult Sprague Dawley rats (Harlan Laboratories) or C57B1/6 mice (Jackson Laboratories) are group housed under a 12 hr light/dark cycle with access to food and water ad libitum. All animal studies are approved by the Vanderbilt University Medical Center Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and conducted in accordance with the National Institutes of Health Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals.

Compound Preparation/Administration: Scopolamine (Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) is diluted in saline to a concentration of 0.2-1 mg/ml and administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) in at a volume of 1 ml/kg. Vehicle or test compound are administered at a predetermined pretreatment time and route prior to administration of vehicle or scopolamine and testing is conducted 30 minutes later.

Procedure: Rats or mice are handled for two consecutive days prior to testing. Animals are habituated to the antechamber testing room for a minimum of one hour prior to testing each day. Animals are given a pretreatment of test compound followed by scopolamine and placed in a sound-attenuating conditioning chamber (Med Associates, St. Albans, Vt.) in the presence of 1 mL of a 10% vanilla extract solution. Following a 2-3 min habituation period, animals received a series (1-4) of tone-shock pairing trials (30 sec, 85 dB, 3000 Hz tone; 1 s, 0.5-0.7 mA foot shock) with an intertrial interval of 30-60 sec and then returned to their home cages. Twenty-four hours later, the contextual fear response is assessed in the same conditioning environment for 2-3 min, measuring freezing behavior in the absence of any tone, shock stimuli or drug. Testing sessions are recorded and time spent freezing is scored by blinded personnel (MED-VFC-RS, MedAssociates).

Statistical Analysis: All statistical analyses are performed in GraphPad Prism 5 (GraphPad San Diego, Calif.). The effects of various pharmacological conditions recognition index are compared using a One-way Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) with Dunnett's post-hoc tests.

b. Novel Object Recognition Task Model

A further exemplary suitable assay for determination of the in vivo effects of the disclosed compounds is assessment of the enhancement of novel object recognition. Such activity may be assessed according to the method described herein below.

Subjects: Male adult Sprague Dawley rats (Harlan, Indianapolis, Ind.) or C57B1/6 mice (Jackson Laboratories) are group housed under a 12 hr light/dark cycle with access to food and water ad libitum. All animal studies are approved by the Vanderbilt University Medical Center Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and conducted in accordance with the National Institutes of Health Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals.

Procedure: Animals are habituated in an empty novel object recognition (NOR) arena consisting of dark colored plexiglass box (32×32×40 cm) for 10 min. Approximately 24 hr later the animals are administered test compound and placed back into their home cage for 30 min. Animals are then placed back into the NOR arena containing 2 identical objects for 10 min. Following the exposure period, animals are placed back into their home cages. One (mice) or two (rats) hours later, the animals are returned to the arena in which one of the previously exposed (familiar) objects is replaced by a novel object. The animals are video recorded for 10 min while they explore the objects. Time spent exploring each object is scored by an observer blinded to the experimental conditions and the recognition index is calculated as [(Time spent exploring novel object)−(Time spent exploring familiar object)]/Total time exploring objects.

Statistical Analysis: All statistical analyses are performed in GraphPad Prism 5 (GraphPad San Diego, Calif.). The effects of various pharmacological conditions recognition index are compared using a One-way Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) with Dunnett's post-hoc tests.

C. Radial Arm Maze Test Model

An additional exemplary suitable assay for determination of the in vivo effects of the disclosed compounds is assessment of the reversal of scopolamine-induced disruption in the eight arm radial arm maze test. Such activity may be assessed according to the method described below.

Subjects: Adult male Long Evans rats (Harlan, Indianapolis, Ind.) or C57B1/6 mice (Jackson Laboratories) are group housed under a 12 hr light/dark cycle with access to food and water ad libitum. All animal studies are approved by the Vanderbilt University Medical Center Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and conducted in accordance with the National Institutes of Health Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals.

Apparatus: The eight arm radial maze consists of eight equidistantly-spaced clear plexiglass aims radiating from a circular central arena. At the end of each arm there is a food cup, the contents of which are not visible from the central platform. The task requires that the animals enter each arm to retrieve the food pellets and use spatial cues in the room to remember which arms of the maze they have previously entered. Several posters mounted on the walls of the experimental room, as well as the permanent items in the room (e.g. sink and experimenter), serve as the visual cues and remain in a constant location throughout experiments. Training and testing are performed under normal lighting conditions.

Compound Preparation/Administration: Scopolamine (Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) is diluted in saline to a concentration of 0.5-1 mg/ml and is administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) in at a volume of 1 ml/kg. Vehicle or test compound is administered at a predetermined pretreatment time and route prior to administration of vehicle or scopolamine and testing is conducted 30 minutes later.

Procedure: To provide motivation to perform the working memory task animals are food restricted to achieve 80-85% of their free-feeding weights. Beginning seven days prior to maze habituation animals are weighed daily and are provided food to maintain target weights. On the third and fourth days of food restriction, the animals are fed an equivalent weight (approximately 25-30 g) of the sucrose pellets that serve as reinforcements on the maze, in order to habituate them and reduce any potential neophobia when exposed to the pellets during training.

Maze Habituation: On the first day of habituation to the maze, reinforcements are placed near the entrance, at the mid-point, and in the food cup at the end of each arm. Each animal is placed on the maze and allowed to explore and consume the reinforcement pellets for a period of five minutes, or until all pellets are consumed. On the second day of habituation, the pellets are placed at the mid-point and in the food cup at the end of each arm. Again, the animals are allowed to explore the maze until all pellets are consumed or until five minutes have elapsed. Training is begun on the third day of exposure to the maze.

Maze Training: During training, one reinforcement pellet is placed in the food cup at the end of each arm. Animals are placed on the maze facing away from the experimenter, facing the same arm at the start of each trial. The timer is started and each arm entry (1 through 8) is recorded in sequence. An entry is defined as all four paws entering an arm. The animals are allowed to choose arms until all eight arms are entered and pellets are consumed, or until 30 choices are made or 5 minutes have elapsed. Entry into an aim previously chosen is counted as an error. If an animal fails to choose all eight arms in 5 minutes, the arms not chosen are also counted as errors. Animals are trained once a day on five days per week (Mon-Fri) and the training criterion is defined as two or fewer errors on two consecutive training days, which is typically achieved after 15 days of training.

Maze Testing: Once the training criterion is met by all subjects, drug testing is initiated. During testing, one reinforcement pellet is placed in the food cup at the end of each arm. Animals are placed on the maze facing away from the experimenter, facing the same arm at the start of each trial. The timer is started and each aim entry (1 through 8) is recorded in sequence. An entry is defined as all four paws entering an arm. The animals are allowed to choose arms until all eight arms are entered and pellets are consumed, or until 30 choices are made or 5 minutes have elapsed. Entry into an arm previously chosen is counted as an error. If an animal fails to choose all eight anus in 5 minutes, the aims not chosen are also counted as errors. On Tuesdays and Thursdays all animals are tested to identify those qualified for drug testing on Wednesdays and Fridays. Animals that commit two or fewer errors within the allotted 5 minutes on qualifying days are randomly assigned to treatment groups and are subjected to drug testing by an experimenter that is blinded to each animal's treatment. After each qualifying day animals to be tested are again randomly assigned to treatment groups and are tested the following day. Testing is accomplished by administration of drug treatments followed by placement of the animals individually on the maze after the predetermined drug pretreatment times. A typical experiment will, therefore, consist of the following treatment groups: 1) vehicle+vehicle; 2) vehicle+scopolamine (0.5 mg/kg); 3) Compound X (Dose 1)+scopolamine (0.5 mg/kg); 4) Compound X (Dose 2)+scopolamine (0.5 mg/kg); 5) Compound X (Dose 3)+scopolamine (0.5 mg/kg); and 6) Compound X (Dose 4)+scopolamine (0.5 mg/kg).

Data Analysis: Dependent measures include number of errors, time (sec) to completion, percentage of correct choices, and number of choices to the first error. For number of errors and number of choices to first error, data are analyzed using a generalized linear mixed model assuming an underlying Poisson distribution, followed by Hochberg's multiple comparison tests for comparison of treatment groups to the control group (vehicle+scopolamine group). Time to completion (after log transformation) and percentage of correct choices data are analyzed using a generalized linear mixed model, followed by Dunnett's tests for comparison of treatment groups to the control group.

Compounds of the present invention are expected as a class to show in vivo efficacy in a preclinical rat models of learning and cognition, where known, clinically useful therapeutic agents for learning and cognition disorders display similar positive responses. For example, disclosed compounds as described hereinbefore, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, are expected to show such in vivo effects. Moreover, compounds prepared using the disclosed synthetic methods are also expected to show such in vivo effects.

21. Prophetic Pharmaceutical Composition Examples

“Active ingredient” as used throughout these examples relates to one or more disclosed compounds or products of disclosed methods of making as described hereinbefore, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or polymorph thereof. The following examples of the formulation of the compounds of the present invention in tablets, suspension, injectables and ointments are prophetic. Typical examples of recipes for the formulation of the invention are as given below.

Typical examples of recipes for the formulation of the invention are as given below. Various other dosage forms can be applied herein such as a filled gelatin capsule, liquid emulsion/suspension, ointments, suppositories or chewable tablet form employing the disclosed compounds in desired dosage amounts in accordance with the present invention. Various conventional techniques for preparing suitable dosage forms can be used to prepare the prophetic pharmaceutical compositions, such as those disclosed herein and in standard reference texts, for example the British and US Pharmacopoeias, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Co.) and Martindale The Extra Pharmacopoeia (London The Pharmaceutical Press).

The disclosure of this reference is hereby incorporated herein by reference.

a. Pharmaceutical Composition for Oral Administration

A tablet can be prepared as follows:

Component Amount Active ingredient 10 to 500 mg Lactose 100 mg Crystalline cellulose 60 mg Magnesium stearate 5 Starch (e.g. potato starch) Amount necessary to yield total weight indicated below Total (per capsule) 1000 mg

Alternatively, about 100 mg of a disclosed compound, 50 mg of lactose (monohydrate), 50 mg of maize starch (native), 10 mg of polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP 25) (e.g. from BASF, Ludwigshafen, Germany) and 2 mg of magnesium stearate are used per tablet. The mixture of active component, lactose and starch is granulated with a 5% solution (m/m) of the PVP in water. After drying, the granules are mixed with magnesium stearate for 5 min. This mixture is moulded using a customary tablet press (e.g. tablet format: diameter 8 mm, curvature radius 12 mm). The moulding force applied is typically about 15 kN.

Alternatively, a disclosed compound can be administered in a suspension formulated for oral use. For example, about 100-5000 mg of the desired disclosed compound, 1000 mg of ethanol (96%), 400 mg of xanthan gum, and 99 g of water are combined with stirring. A single dose of about 10-500 mg of the desired disclosed compound according can be provided by 10 ml of oral suspension.

In these Examples, active ingredient can be replaced with the same amount of any of the compounds according to the present invention, in particular by the same amount of any of the exemplified compounds. In some circumstances it may be desirable to use a capsule, e.g. a filled gelatin capsule, instead of a tablet form. The choice of tablet or capsule will depend, in part, upon physicochemical characteristics of the particular disclosed compound used.

Examples of alternative useful carriers for making oral preparations are lactose, sucrose, starch, talc, magnesium stearate, crystalline cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, glycerin, sodium alginate, gum arabic, etc. These alternative carriers can be substituted for those given above as required for desired dissolution, absorption, and manufacturing characteristics.

The amount of a disclosed compound per tablet for use in a pharmaceutical composition for human use is determined from both toxicological and pharmacokinetic data obtained in suitable animal models, e.g. rat and at least one non-rodent species, and adjusted based upon human clinical trial data. For example, it could be appropriate that a disclosed compound is present at a level of about 10 to 1000 mg per tablet dosage unit.

b. Pharmaceutical Composition for Injectable Use

A parenteral composition can be prepared as follows:

Component Amount Active ingredient 10 to 500 mg Sodium carbonate 560 mg* Sodium hydroxide 80 mg* Distilled, sterile water Quantity sufficient to prepare total volume indicated below. Total (per capsule) 10 ml per ampule *Amount adjusted as required to maintain physiological pH in the context of the amount of active ingredient, and form of active ingredient, e.g. a particular salt form of the active ingredient.

Alternatively, a pharmaceutical composition for intravenous injection can be used, with composition comprising about 100-5000 mg of a disclosed compound, 15 g polyethylenglycol 400 and 250 g water in saline with optionally up to about 15% Cremophor EL, and optionally up to 15% ethyl alcohol, and optionally up to 2 equivalents of a pharmaceutically suitable acid such as citric acid or hydrochloric acid are used. The preparation of such an injectable composition can be accomplished as follows: The disclosed compound and the polyethylenglycol 400 are dissolved in the water with stirring. The solution is sterile filtered (pore size 0.22 μm) and filled into heat sterilized infusion bottles under aseptic conditions. The infusion bottles are sealed with rubber seals.

In a further example, a pharmaceutical composition for intravenous injection can be used, with composition comprising about 10-500 mg of a disclosed compound, standard saline solution, optionally with up to 15% by weight of Cremophor EL, and optionally up to 15% by weight of ethyl alcohol, and optionally up to 2 equivalents of a pharmaceutically suitable acid such as citric acid or hydrochloric acid. Preparation can be accomplished as follows: a desired disclosed compound is dissolved in the saline solution with stirring. Optionally Cremophor EL, ethyl alcohol or acid are added. The solution is sterile filtered (pore size 0.22 μm) and filled into heat sterilized infusion bottles under aseptic conditions. The infusion bottles are sealed with rubber seals.

In this example, active ingredient can be replaced with the same amount of any of the compounds according to the present invention, in particular by the same amount of any of the exemplified compounds.

The amount of a disclosed compound per ampule for use in a pharmaceutical composition for human use is determined from both toxicological and pharmacokinetic data obtained in suitable animal models, e.g. rat and at least one non-rodent species, and adjusted based upon human clinical trial data. For example, it could be appropriate that a disclosed compound is present at a level of about 10 to 1000 mg per tablet dosage unit.

Carriers suitable for parenteral preparations are, for example, water, physiological saline solution, etc. which can be used with tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide or the like serving as a solubilizer or pH adjusting agent. The parenteral preparations contain preferably 50 to 1000 mg of a disclosed compound per dosage unit.

It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope or spirit of the invention. Other aspects of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art from consideration of the specification and practice of the invention disclosed herein. It is intended that the specification and examples be considered as exemplary only, with a true scope and spirit of the invention being indicated by the following claims. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A compound having a formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: R^(1a) is hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; R^(1b) is hydrogen, halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, or —CN; R^(2a) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; R^(2b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; R^(3a) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; R^(3b) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; R^(3c) is hydrogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, or —CF₃; R^(10a) is hydrogen, —F, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂ or —CF₃; R^(10b) is hydrogen, —F, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂ or —CF₃; Ar¹ is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure, where aryl and heteroaryl are each optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃, and —CN, or where aryl and heteroaryl are each optionally substituted with 1 substituent independently selected from the group consisting of C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —C(O)R⁶, and —S(O)₂R⁷; R⁶ is C1-C3 alkylamino or C1-C3 dialkylamino, R⁷ is C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, or C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl; and Ar² is aryl or heteroaryl having 5 to 9 atoms in the ring structure, where aryl and heteroaryl are each optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino and cyclopropyl.
 2. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R^(1a) is hydrogen and R^(1b) is hydrogen.
 3. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R^(2a) is hydrogen and R^(2b) is hydrogen.
 4. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R^(10a) is hydrogen and R^(10b) is hydrogen.
 5. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, having the formula


6. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, having the formula


7. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound has a formula:

wherein R^(3b) is hydrogen or —CH₃.
 8. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein the compound has a formula:

wherein: R^(3b) is hydrogen or —CH₃; and wherein 0, 1, or 2 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) or R^(20c) is/are independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CH₃, —CH₂F, —CHF₂, —CF₃ and —CN; or where 0 or 1 of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d) or R^(20e) is independently selected from the group consisting of C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 haloalkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C1-C3 alkoxyalkyl, C1-C3 alkylamino, C1-C3 dialkylamino, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C2-C5 heterocycloalkyl, Ar², —C(O)R⁶, and —S(O)₂R⁷; and where the remaining of R^(20a), R^(20b), R^(20c), R^(20d), and R^(20e) are independently hydrogen.
 9. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound has a formula:

wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen or —CH₃.
 10. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound has a formula:

wherein: R^(3a) is hydrogen or —CH₃; and R^(3b) is hydrogen or —CH₃.
 11. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of


12. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
 13. A method for modulating muscarinic acetylcholine receptor M1 activity in a mammal, comprising the step of administering to the mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 14. The method of claim 13, wherein the mammal has a disorder selected from the group consisting of a neurological disorder and a psychiatric disorder.
 15. The method of claim 14, wherein the neurological disorder or psychiatric disorder is selected from the group consisting of psychosis, schizophrenia, conduct disorder, disruptive behavior disorder, bipolar disorder, a psychotic episode of anxiety, anxiety associated with psychosis, a psychotic mood disorder, severe major depressive disorder, a mood disorder associated with psychotic disorders, acute mania, depression associated with bipolar disorder, a mood disorder associated with schizophrenia, a behavioral manifestation of mental retardation, autistic disorder; a movement disorder, Tourette's syndrome, akinetic-rigid syndrome, a movement disorder associated with Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia, drug induced dyskinesia, neurodegeneration based dyskinesia, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, a cognitive disorder, dementia and/or a memory disorder.
 16. The method of claim 14, wherein the mammal has a disorder is selected from the group consisting of Alzheimer's disease, schizophrenia, a sleep disorder, a pain disorder and a cognitive disorder.
 17. The method of claim 16, wherein the pain disorder is selected from the group consisting of neuropathic pain, central pain syndrome, postsurgical pain syndrome, bone and joint pain, repetitive motion pain, dental pain, cancer pain, myofascial pain, perioperative pain, chronic pain, dysmennorhea, inflammatory pain, headache, migraine headache, cluster headache, headache, primary hyperalgesia, secondary hyperalgesis, primary allodynia, and secondary allodynia.
 18. The method of claim 14, wherein the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step.
 19. The method of claim 14, further comprising the step of identifying a mammal in need of treatment of the disorder. 